JP6471408B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a lottery game is executed in which a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, a predetermined symbol is variably displayed on the display device for a predetermined time, and then the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. The While the predetermined symbol is fluctuating, a notice symbol or the like for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed.

JP 2012-223600 A

In this type of pachinko machine, a player there has been a problem that get bored at an early stage.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored with a game early.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays, on the basis of the establishment of the lottery condition, whether or not to determine whether or not the game is correct, and identification information for indicating the result of the determination on whether or not the result is correct. A player after a possible display means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and identification information for indicating a specific determination result, are displayed on the display means. Bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the first game state, a first game state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state A game state setting means for setting one of the game state setting means and a game state determination means for determining a game state set by the game state setting means, wherein the success / failure determination result is the specific success / failure determination result. Ah In this case, as the dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, the dynamic display mode determination unit that determines the first dynamic display mode, and the special game execution unit performs the special game. While performing, effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and the effect state displayed by the effect mode display means and the type of gaming state determined by the gaming state determination means The effect mode selection means that is selected based on the contents of the first dynamic display mode that has been executed before the bonus game is executed, and the effect information in the effect mode that is selected by the effect mode selection means already a memory means capable of storing, in addition to the presentation information stored, actual in the representation embodiment said award game corresponding to the presentation information stored in the storage means If it is, it has a presentation variable execution unit capable of executing the representation embodiment defined by varying the manner in which it is advantageous to the player than when the presentation information is not stored, the first dynamic display The mode and the effect mode are displayed in combination with each other, thereby providing a notification display mode for notifying the game state determined by the game state determination unit, and the effect variable execution unit includes the player It is possible to execute the effect mode that is changed to a mode in which the player can expect the notification display mode to notify that the second gaming state is determined as an advantageous mode. It is configured .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means comprises a liquid crystal display .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the determination unit for determining whether or not the player is satisfied based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the display unit capable of displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit. A benefit that is advantageous to the player after the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means and the identification information for indicating a specific result of the determination on the display means are displayed on the display means. One of a privilege game execution means for executing a game, a first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state A game state setting means for setting the game state and a game state determination means for determining the game state set by the game state setting means, and when the success / failure determination result is the specific success / failure determination result, dynamic As the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display unit, the dynamic display mode determination unit that determines the first dynamic display mode and the bonus game execution unit while executing the bonus game The effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, the type of game state determined by the game state determination means for the effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means, and the bonus game is executed. The effect mode selection means to be selected based on the contents of the first dynamic display mode that have been executed before being performed, and the effect information in the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means are already stored. a memory means capable of storing, in addition to the effect information, when the effect is produced that corresponds to the presentation information stored in the storage means is executed by the award game, before Anda effect variable execution unit capable of executing the representation embodiment defined by varying the manner in which it is advantageous to the player than when presentation information is not stored, and the effect is produced between the first dynamic display mode Are displayed in combination with each other, thereby providing a notification display mode for notifying the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit, and the effect variable execution unit is a mode advantageous to the player. It is configured to be able to execute the effect mode that is changed to a mode in which the player can expect the notification display mode to notify that the second game state has been determined. It is .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2 , in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display, so that various display modes can be displayed. There is.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotational operation unit as seen from the front of the exploded rotational operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotational operation unit as seen from the front of the exploded rotational operation unit. (A) is a front view of a case body, (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the support structure by the case body of a 1st gearwheel, a 2nd gearwheel, and a 3rd gearwheel. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the compound operation unit which looked at the compound operation unit which decomposed | disassembled front. It is a disassembled perspective view of a compound operation unit in the state where a part of compound operation unit was disassembled. It is a front perspective view of an opening / closing first gear, an opening / closing second gear, a rotating first gear, and a rotating second gear. It is the elements on larger scale of the compound operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening and closing 1st gear and the opening and closing 2nd gear, the rotation 1st gear, and the rotation 2nd gear to the 1st axis and the 2nd axis in time series. It is the elements on larger scale of the compound operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening and closing 1st gear and the opening and closing 2nd gear, the rotation 1st gear, and the rotation 2nd gear to the 1st axis and the 2nd axis in time series. It is a disassembled front view of the compound operation unit for demonstrating the relative displacement state of the opening-and-closing 2nd gearwheel and a slide rack member with respect to a back arm body. It is a front view of the compound operation unit which illustrated opening and closing operation and rotation operation of an operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which shows typically the meshing state of an opening-and-closing 1st gear and an opening-and-closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of a rotation 1st gear and a rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which shows typically the meshing state of an opening-and-closing 1st gear and an opening-and-closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of a rotation 1st gear and a rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which shows typically the meshing state of an opening-and-closing 1st gear and an opening-and-closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of a rotation 1st gear and a rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged in the retreat position. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged in the joint position. (A) is a front view of a 1st joint operation unit, (b) is a bottom view of the 1st joint operation unit in the arrow XXXb direction view of Drawing 33 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st joint operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the first combined operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of a slide mechanism part, (b) is a back perspective view of a slide mechanism part. It is the front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked at the disassembled slide mechanism part from the front. It is the back perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked back at the disassembled slide mechanism part. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position, (b) is the 1st joint in the state where the 1st joint member was arranged in the joint position It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd combined operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd joint operation | movement unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd joint operation | movement unit. It is a front view of the 2nd combined operation unit. It is the model figure which looked at the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged in the joint position. It is a front perspective view of the annular operation unit in a state where the annular forming member is disposed at the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the annular operation unit in a state where the annular forming member is arranged at the coupling position. It is the exploded front perspective view of the annular operation unit which looked at the exploded annular operation unit from the front. It is the exploded back perspective view of the annular operation unit which looked at the exploded annular operation unit from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of a link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member, and (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member at a portion Lc in FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG. It is a partial expanded rear view of an annular motion unit. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a ring operation unit which illustrates typically a ring operation unit in which a pair of ring formation members are arranged in a retreat position. FIG. 53 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LIII-LIII in FIG. 52. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a ring operation unit which illustrates typically a ring operation unit in which a pair of ring formation members are arranged in the middle of a retreat position and a joint position. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular | circular shaped operation unit in the LV-LV line | wire of FIG. It is a back surface schematic diagram of the annular motion unit which illustrates typically the annular motion unit in which a pair of annular formation members are arranged in a joint position. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit in the state in which the arm member was projected to the projecting position. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit in a state where the arm member is retracted to the retracted position. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit which looked at the rocking | fluctuation operation | movement unit disassembled front. (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit in a state in which the arm member is disposed at the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIb of FIG. 61 (a). is there. (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). (A) is a rear view of the swing operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit in the portion LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a). It is the timing chart shown about an example of the example of selection of the background mode in a normal game period and a time production period. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the main controller. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection table, and (c) is a regular hit random number table. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the variation pattern selection table for jackpots which is a part of variation pattern selection table, (b) is the variation pattern selection for a removal which is a part of variation pattern selection table It is the figure which showed the table typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of a voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of a voice lamp control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the sub fluctuation pattern selection table in case a normal background is displayed. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the sub fluctuation pattern selection table in case a forced background is displayed. It is the schematic diagram which showed the normal background selection table typically. It is the figure which showed the content of the normal background notice selection table typically, (b) is the figure which showed the content of the forced background notice selection table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the display production command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) showed the display preview command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart which shows the display back command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the timing chart shown about an example of the operation timing of the rotating member and special symbol in the form of FIG. (A)-(b) is the timing chart which showed an example of the display mode of the special symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the rotation member in a form of Drawing 99 (b) operates. It is a timing chart which showed an example of the display mode of the special symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in case the rotating member in the form of Drawing 99 (b) operates. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in FIG.99 (b) form, (b) is the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in FIG.99 (b) form. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of pseudo fluctuation selection table in the form of FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of pseudo fluctuation selection table in the form of FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in FIG.99 (b) form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the form of FIG.99 (b). It is the flowchart which showed the normal production | presentation selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the FIG.99 (b) form. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the form of FIG. 99 (b). It is the timing chart which showed an example in case the fusion production in 3rd Embodiment is performed. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the fusion production in 3rd Embodiment is performed. It is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in case the fusion production in a 3rd embodiment is performed. (A)-(b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the long press effect in 3rd Embodiment is performed. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment typically. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fusion production | presentation selection table in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the content of the fusion fluctuation pattern selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal production | presentation selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fusion jackpot production process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the jackpot production in 4th Embodiment is performed. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the jackpot production in 4th Embodiment is performed. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure shown about the example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the compound operation unit which is 5th Embodiment operate | moves. (A)-(b) is the figure shown about the example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in case the compound operation unit which is 5th Embodiment operate | moves.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 35, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first prize opening 64, a second prize opening 640, a first variable prize winning device 65, a second variable prize winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally elongated first specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the lower left side of the first winning port 64, and has a circular shape having the same size as the other winning ports 63, 64, and 640 at a substantially central portion thereof. A second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a that are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning ports 65a and 650a are closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning ports 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for driving the opening / closing operation forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening that is a guide path that guides the ball to the second specific winning port 650a and an opening that is on the opposite side of the guide path from the second specific winning port 650a side. 651, a driving member 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving member 650b to open and close in the horizontal direction about the lower side of the opening 651 And. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving tool 650b to the right, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the second specific winning opening 650a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state of closed time.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning ports 65a and 650a is triggered for a predetermined time when the ball wins into the specific winning ports 65a and 650a while the specific winning ports 65a and 650a are opened. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the number of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of plural (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning port 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71 and a second out port 72. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out port 71 or the second out port 72 (not shown). Guided to the road. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64, while the second out port 72 is disposed on the left side of the second specific winning port 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is disposed on the opposite side of the first out port 71 with the second specific winning port 650a interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a sphere that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) in front of the second specific prize opening 650a, 61 or the outer edge member 73 is flowed along the inclination of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61 on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning port 650a). ) That has reached () flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22, RTC (real time clock) 264, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Details of the configuration of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each component such as the winning ports 63, 64, 65 a, 640, 650 a and the out ports 71, 72 in the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, while each structure, such as winning opening 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, is illustrated typically, a part of game board 13 is partially expanded and illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the inner rail 61 has a portion disposed on the lower right side (a portion on the right side of the first out port 71) in a front view of the game area and extends linearly. It is formed to be inclined upward in the direction away from the 1-out port 71.

  Between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin outer edge member 73 that defines the outer edge of the game area together with the two rails 61 and 62 is disposed. The The outer edge member 73 has an arcuate wall 73a formed by providing an arcuate wall surface extending from the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and is continuously provided below the arcuate wall 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface side, and extending linearly while being inclined downward toward the inner rail 61 and continuously provided below the vertical wall portion 73b. It consists of the inclined wall part 73c formed by providing the wall surface provided in an inner surface side.

  In this way, the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73 has a substantially circular part (lower right part in FIG. 5) formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. Shaped. Specifically, a region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 disposed on the right side of the first out port 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 is substantially rectangular. Formed.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the game area is formed in a substantially circular shape obtained by extending the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, the game area as a whole is provided by the provision of a substantially rectangular area (lower right portion in FIG. 5). The area can be enlarged. Therefore, the enlarged area is used as a space for arranging the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, and the like. Or it can utilize as a space for forming the path | route which flows down a ball | bowl, and the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning, such as each winning opening 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the flow path | route of a ball | bowl, can be raised. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered (lower side in FIG. 5), so that the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased accordingly.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5) below the third symbol display device 81. It was. For this reason, the necessary space below the third symbol display device 81 is increased in the vertical direction, and the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81 is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, an enlarged portion of the gaming area (substantially rectangular area, the lower right portion in FIG. 5) is formed as an arrangement space such as a prize opening or a flow path of a ball. It can be used as a space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged not in the immediate vicinity of the first winning opening 64 but in the enlarged portion of the game area described above. Accordingly, since the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered downward, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific prize opening 650a is not directly below the first prize opening 64, but on the one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first prize opening 64 (variable prize apparatus). The ball is not allowed to pass between the position that is offset to the opposite side of 65 (left side in FIG. 5) and abuts against the inner rail 61 (the lower edge of the game area) (that is, between the second specific prize opening 650a and the inner rail 61). Is located). Accordingly, since the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered downward, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In this case, according to the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, the path for discharging the ball from the gaming area to the ball discharge path is provided at two places (the first out port 71 and the second out port 72). Further enlargement of the three-symbol display device 81 is possible.

  That is, in order to increase the size of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is lowered downward, and accordingly, the position of the winning opening needs to be lowered. For example, when the position of the first winning port 64 is lowered, the guide plate member 74 (a member that guides the right-handed ball (the ball that has passed rightward of the variable display device unit 80) to the second specific winning port 650a. ) Also needs to be lowered in order to secure a space for the ball to flow down from the first winning port 64, and as a result, the position of the second specific winning port 650a also needs to be lowered.

  However, if the position of the second specific winning opening 650a is lowered too much, it is not possible to secure a space for flowing the ball below the second specific winning opening 650a (between the inner rail 61). In other words, the ball that has flowed down without winning the prize winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening arranged below the first winning prize opening 64. For this reason, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific prize winning opening 650a downward, which becomes a factor that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be sufficiently enlarged.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first out port 71, the second out port 72 sandwiches the second specific winning port 650a and the first out port 71. (Ie, the first out port 71 and the second out port 72 are respectively disposed on the right side and the left side of the second specific winning port 650a), so that the ball flows down in the game area. The ball that has reached the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 5) from the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined to the inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73. The ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning port 650a is allowed to flow down along the inner rail 61. Flow along a slope (curvature) Is allowed, it can be discharged from the second out-port 72 to the spherical discharge passage.

  Thus, by providing two paths (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the ball from the game area to the ball discharge path, the second specific winning port 650a (inner rail) 61), it is unnecessary to secure a space for the sphere to flow down. Therefore, since the position of the 2nd specific prize opening 650a can be lowered further (closer to the inner rail 61 or connected), the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered accordingly, and consequently Since the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased accordingly.

  In the present embodiment, the second prize winning port 640 and the first specific prize winning port 65a are arranged offset to the right side of the board surface, and the second specific prize winning port 650a is offset to the left side of the board surface and close to the inner rail 61. By being arranged (or abutting), it is possible to more effectively perform the effect by the rotary operation unit 300.

  That is, when the player makes a right strike, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noticed by the player, and in particular, for the ball that has not been awarded to the second prize opening 640, The downflow is rarely noticed by players. In this case, in the present embodiment, among the spheres that have passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80, the sphere that has passed from the right to the left above the second winning opening 640 has passed above the guide plate member 74, It flows down toward the second specific prize winning opening 650a. For this reason, even when the second prize opening 640 has not been won, an opportunity to win the second specific prize opening 650a is generated, and the second prize winning expectation to the second specific prize opening 650a is expected to be the second. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the sphere that has passed from the right to the left above the winning opening 640 (the line of sight is directed). Accordingly, the player's line of sight can be directed toward the center of the board surface below the variable display device unit 80. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotary operation unit 300 is visible through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when a ball that has not been won at the second prize opening 640 flows down toward the second specific prize opening 650a, the player also visually recognizes the effect by the rotation operation unit 300, and the rotation operation is performed. The production effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the player can visually recognize the rotary operation unit 300 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Is possible. Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is a device that is operated in response to winning in the first winning opening 64 or in response to a result of a lottery by winning, and on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), It is arranged at a position corresponding to one winning opening 64.

  Therefore, for the player who follows the ball flowing toward the first winning port 64, especially when the ball wins the first winning port 64, the rotation operation is performed behind the first winning port 64. Since the effect by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect accompanying the winning of the ball to the first winning opening 64 can be effectively performed. The detailed configuration of the rotation operation unit 300 will be described later.

  In this case, since the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are offset with respect to the first winning port 64 in the left-right direction (the width direction of the game area, the right direction in FIG. 5), The positions of the first winning port 64 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be lowered (lower side in FIG. 5), and as a result, the rotary operation unit 300 is located at a position corresponding to the first winning port 64 and the gaming board 13. Even when it is disposed on the back side of the (base plate 60), the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  That is, when the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction as in a conventional pachinko machine, the position corresponding to the first winning port 64 In this case, the rotation operation unit 300 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) because the rotation operation unit 300 interferes with the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65. The space required for the arrangement of the winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the first variable winning device 65 is increased in the vertical direction, which obstructs the increase in the size of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 are in the horizontal direction with respect to the first winning port 64. Since it is arranged offset (in the width direction of the game area), the interference between the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be avoided. Thus, the position of the first winning port 64 can be lowered downward, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In particular, the first variable winning device 65 is offset to the right side by using a substantially rectangular area on the lower right side of the game area, so that the offset amount can be sufficiently secured and the second variable With respect to the winning device 650, the second out port 72 is provided in addition to the first out port 71, so that the position can be lowered downward without taking into account the space below for the ball to flow down. it can. Thereby, since the space for arrange | positioning the rotation operation unit 300 can be ensured more widely, the contradictory subject of the enlargement of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 and the enlargement of the rotation operation unit 300 can be solved. As a result, the effect of both the effect by the third symbol display device 81 and the effect by the rotary operation unit 300 can be enhanced.

  Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that can rotate around the first winning port 64. Thereby, the whole circumference | surroundings surrounding the 1st winning opening 64 can be made into the area | region for production. That is, the player can visually recognize the effect by the rotary operation unit 300 on the back side of the first winning port 64. Therefore, in the case where the production starts with the winning of the first prize opening 64 as a trigger, the production is performed in an area centered on the first prize opening 64 where the ball has entered, whereby the first prize opening 64 is obtained. The production effect of the production accompanying winning a prize can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the player starts to win a ball to the first winning opening 64 when the state (for example, the rotation position or the lighting state) of the rotation operation unit 300 becomes a predetermined state, A game ball can be made to enter the center of the object (the rotary motion unit 300 in a predetermined state) that is being visually recognized by the player, and the effect of staging by the rotary motion unit 300 can be enhanced. .

  Furthermore, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape as described above, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively used, and the arrangement space for other prize winning holes and the like can be efficiently used. Can be secured. In particular, the space for arranging the second variable winning device 650 can be efficiently secured. In other words, the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right side with respect to the first winning port 64 by using the area that is enlarged in a substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side of the game area. While it is relatively easy to secure, the second variable winning device 650 is difficult to secure a sufficient amount of offset to the left with respect to the first winning port 64 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 has a substantially circular shape, a space for disposing the second variable winning device 650 is efficiently provided between the inner rail 61 and the lower left side of the rotary operation unit 300. Can be secured.

  Further, since the rotational operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape centering on the first winning opening 64, the rotational operation unit 300 can be disposed at the approximate center in the width direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 5) of the game area. it can. That is, the center of the rotational operation unit 300 can be arranged on the imaginary line where the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (the distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 5) is maximum. Therefore, the space of the game area can be effectively utilized while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, so that the space for disposing the rotation operation unit 300 can be secured more widely and the rotation operation can be performed. The unit 300 can be increased in size efficiently.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640 is not directly below the first winning port 64, but on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port 64 (the first variable winning device 65 side). The right side of FIG. In this case, the second winning opening 640 is disposed in such a posture that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the gaming area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a space for allowing the ball to flow down to win the second winning port 640 above the second winning port 640, and accordingly, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 correspondingly. Can be lowered downward. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific prize opening 650a is not directly below the first prize opening 64, but on the one side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable prize) with respect to the first prize opening 64. Opposite to the device 65, the left side of FIG. In this case, the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged in such a posture that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the gaming area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). Accordingly, it is unnecessary to provide a space for the ball to flow down to win the second specific winning port 650a above the second specific winning port 650a, and accordingly, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81. The position of can be lowered downward. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged in a posture facing the upper side of the game area (upper side in FIG. 5), a space for allowing the ball to flow down is provided. It is necessary to ensure the position directly above the openings 641 and 651, and accordingly, it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 is hindered. On the other hand, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area as in this embodiment, a space for flowing down the ball is obliquely above the openings 641 and 651 (upper right side in FIG. 5). Therefore, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  As described above, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric winnings 640a and 650b are not placed directly above the second prize winning opening 640 and the second specific winning prize opening 650a. It can arrange | position to the side of the winning opening 640 and the 2nd specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is not necessary to secure the space for arranging the electric winnings 640a and 650b directly above the second winning port 640 and the second specific winning port 650a, and accordingly, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered. Can be lowered. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased.

  Furthermore, since the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric accessories 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641 and 651, and only one side is provided. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for the driving means (for example, solenoid) for driving the electric accessories 640a and 650b can be reduced, and the component cost can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty of winning the prize to the second prize opening 640 from excessively decreasing. That is, in this embodiment, since the position of the lower edge of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is lowered, the arrangement space for the winning opening etc. is limited, and the arrangement positions of the second winning opening 640 and the through gate 67 are limited. The interval is narrowed. Therefore, compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, the difficulty level of entering the second winning port 640 is more difficult. There is a risk of lowering the gameability. Therefore, when the opening 641 is formed so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from directly above the second winning opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. It is possible to make it possible to win a prize at the second winning opening 640 only. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty of winning a prize to the second prize opening 640 from decreasing, and to improve the game playability.

  In addition, since the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, even if the distance from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 5) is increased, It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific prize opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of a ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is disposed between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Can do. Thereby, since the detection speed that the ball has won the second specific winning opening 650a can be increased, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of exaltation accompanying the winning.

  In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning to the second specific winning port 650a. That is, in the case where the second specific prize opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls has won the opened second specific prize opening 650a, It is desirable that the driving member 650b is closed as soon as the ball wins. However, when the sensor device 652 is disposed behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 is increased.

  Therefore, the period until the tenth sphere passes through the opening 651 and reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period during which the driving agent 650 b is in the open state, becomes longer. There is a possibility that a state where a prize can be won is formed in the second specific prize opening 650a over a long period of time and the game is not fair.

  On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 that detects the winning of the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, the period until the sensor device 652 detects the sphere that has passed through the opening 651 can be shortened. This makes it difficult for the eleventh and subsequent balls to win from the opening 651, thereby preventing over-winning.

  Here, in the gaming board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged offset in the left and right (other side and one side) directions of the gaming board 13, respectively. This allows the player to make a left-right distinction and contributes to improved game playability.

  That is, in the game board 13 of this embodiment, it is easier to win the first specific prize opening 65a by passing the right side of the variable display unit 80, while the variable display device is provided to the second specific prize opening 650a. The arrangement is such that the player who passes the left side of the unit 80 is more likely to win a prize. Which specific prize opening is to be opened is determined by the jackpot stop pattern at that time, and the player will divide left and right in order to aim at the specific prize opening on the side to be opened.

  Which specific prize opening is opened can be set in units of the number of times (round) for each jackpot stop symbol, so only the first specific prize opening 65a or the second specific prize opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a may be alternately opened every number of times (rounds).

  Therefore, the player needs to confirm which specific winning opening is opened in rounds, and to distinguish between the left and right in order to aim at the opened special winning opening. This has the effect of attracting attention not only to the other side but also to the other side. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13 and to create a situation in which the rotary operation unit 300 disposed behind the first winning port 64 enters the field of view. Thus, attention can be paid to the rotary operation unit 300, and the effect of the presentation can be improved.

  Also, by making the decision to divide left and right for each jackpot number (round), it is possible to prevent the player from being bored, and by allowing the player to divide left and right, the same attitude A feeling of fatigue caused by playing a game can be alleviated.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, a housing structure for the units 300 to 800 in the back case 210 will be described.

  6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 when the operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing operation unit 800, the annular operation unit 700, and the first combined operation unit 500 are mounted on the back case 210. In FIG. 9, in addition to the mounting state illustrated in FIG. Further, a state in which the second combined operation unit 600 and the composite operation unit 400 are mounted on the back case 210 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, the operation unit 200 is opened on one side (the front side in FIG. 7) from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 211a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 thereof. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The operation unit 200 includes a rotation operation unit 300, a composite operation unit 400, a first combined operation unit 500, a second combined operation unit 600, an annular operation unit 700, and a swing operation unit 800 in the inner space of the rear case 210. It is accommodated and is configured as one unit.

  Specifically, the first combined operation unit 500 is at a position above the opening 211a, the annular operation unit 700 is at a position below the opening 211a, and the swing operation unit 800 is at a position at the left and right of the opening 211a. These are respectively disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 8).

  In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second combined operation unit 600 is disposed on the front surface side of the annular operation unit 700, and the composite operation unit 500 is disposed on the front surface side of the swing operation unit 800 in a stacked state. And accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 9). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is disposed in a stacked state on the front side of the second combined operation unit 600 and is accommodated in the back case 210 (see FIG. 6).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second combined operation unit 600) is arranged in a stacked state in which another operation unit (for example, the rotation operation unit 300) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, in a front view, at least a part of the predetermined operation unit (for example, the front case body 612 of the second combined operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 is formed of a light transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13, only a necessary part of the predetermined operation unit is required. Can be visually recognized by the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by other operation units. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, an outline of an operation mode of each of the units 300 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 are appropriately referred to.

  10 to 13 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring operation unit 700 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 11 shows a state in which the arm member 820 of the swing operation unit 800 is arranged in the extended position. 12 shows a state in which the first engagement member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are arranged at the coupling position. In FIG. The state in which 492 is disposed at the overhang position is illustrated.

  The ring operating unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790 and moves (displaces) the pair of ring forming members 790 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupled position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring forming members 790 are retracted to the back side of the rotational operation unit 300 while being distributed to the left and right, and are not visible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of ring forming members 790 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81) and coupled to each other (a pair of pairs). The annular shape is formed by the annular forming member 790 of FIG.

  The swing operation unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 formed so as to be swingable (rotatable). The pair of arm members 820 are disposed between a retracted position illustrated in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the projecting position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 project their tips into the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81).

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 include a first engagement member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, respectively. The first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are illustrated in FIG. 9 is moved (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engaging member 539 is retracted to the back side of the composite operation unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the composite operation unit 400, and is visually recognized by the player. It is disabled (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81). Combined with each other.

  The composite operation unit 400 includes four members (operation members 491 and 492) formed so as to be able to swing (rotate), and these four members (operation members 491 and 492) are moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. And is moved (displaced) between the overhang positions shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operation members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81), and each of the two members is a set. It arrange | positions at the attitude | position arranged in a straight line along the up-down direction. On the other hand, at the projecting position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (operation members 491 and 492) project their tips into the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, the front of the third symbol display device 81). , And are arranged in a posture extending radially from the center of the opening 211a.

  The rotation operation unit 300 includes a rotation member 330 formed to be rotatable, and rotates the rotation member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotating member 330 of the rotating operation unit 300 is rotated at a fixed position, and the operating members 491 and 492 of the combined operation unit 400 are in the extended position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged in the forefront at any position, it is always visible from the player via the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

  Each of these operation units 300 to 800 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and as described above, the operation units 300 to 800 are arranged in a stacked state (stacked). Those arranged in different layers can be operated simultaneously. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 13, not only each of the operation units 300 to 800 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of production can be enhanced.

  The rotation operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotational operation unit 300.

  As described above, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) at a position corresponding to the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5) (position overlapping in front view). An effect member to be installed, a receiving port 361 is opened in the center of the front, and a ball won in the first winning port 64 is received from the receiving port 361 and guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through a guide passage 380. To do.

  On the front side of the rotary operation unit 300, a rotary member 330 having an annular shape when viewed from the front and a decorative member 370 that is a resin member for decoration are disposed, and a receiving port 361 is provided at a substantially central portion of the rotary member 330. (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material so as to be rotatable. The rotating member 330 transmits the lighting and blinking of the LED disposed on the back side thereof to the front side and is rotated to thereby receive the first prize. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5).

  FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded front perspective views of the rotary operation unit 300 as viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 16 illustrates a state where only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. In FIG. 17, the decorative member 370 is not shown, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 are partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 includes a case body 310 that forms a skeleton on the back side, an electric decoration base 320 that is fixed to the case body 310, and a front surface of the electric decoration base 320. A rotating member 330 disposed on the side, a plurality of gears (first gear 351, second gear 352, and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving motor 340 to the rotating member 330, and A fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310 and a decorative member 370 disposed around the case body 310 are mainly provided.

  The case body 310 has an electric decoration base attachment portion 311 formed in a substantially circular shape in front view corresponding to the electric decoration base portion 320, and a gear attachment portion formed by retreating to the back side from the electric decoration base attachment portion 311. 312, the electric decoration base mounting portion 311, and the mounting base 313 extending outward from the outer edge of the gear mounting portion 312, respectively, which are integrally formed from a resin material.

  The electrical decoration base attaching part 311 is fastened and fixed with an electrical decoration base 320 on the front side and a decorative member 370 on the outer peripheral side with fastening screws. The gear attachment portion 312 is formed by connecting three concave portions having a substantially circular shape in front view that are formed corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, and the first gear 351 is formed in each of the concave portions. The third gears 353 are housed (arranged).

  An opening 311 a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the electric decoration base mounting portion 311 above the portion of the gear mounting portion 312 that houses the first gear 351. By forming the opening 311a in the case body 310, the rotating member 330 (fastened portion 333) is connected to the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) from the back side of the case body 310 through the opening 311a by a fastening screw. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from being exposed to the front side of the rotating member 330 and to improve the appearance thereof.

  In the gear mounting portion 312, a passage port 314, a fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317 are formed in the concave portion in which the first gear 351 is accommodated. The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides a sphere that has flowed from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to a guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

  The guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a sphere can pass between the attached member and the back surface of the case body 310 by attaching a U-shaped member to the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage port 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

  The mounting base 313 is provided with an insertion hole, and the fastening operation screw inserted into the insertion hole is fastened to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, whereby the rotational operation unit 300 is second coupled. It is fastened and fixed to the back case 210 via the operation unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

  The fastened portion 315 is a portion to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear attachment portion 312 is fastened (a concave portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner periphery). A pair is formed at positions that are asymmetric (see FIG. 18). The insertion part 315 is used to insert a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear attachment part 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the back side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage opening 314.

  The guide convex portion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding (guiding) the rotation of the first gear 351 and protrudes from the front of the gear mounting portion 312 as an annular convex portion when viewed from the front. An annular guide recess 351e corresponding to the guide portion 317 is formed on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. The rotational position of the first gear 351 relative to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

  Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is disposed at a position where the passage port 314 is shifted downward from the center (an eccentric position) in a circular area in a front view formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. The to-be-fastened portion 315 is disposed on the left and right sides of the passage port 314, and the insertion portion 316 is disposed above the passage port 314. Thereby, as will be described later, the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 can be ensured while efficiently securing a space for fastening and fixing in a limited space.

  A shaft portion 318 projects from the gear mounting portion 312 in a recess in which the second gear 352 is accommodated. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352 a drilled in the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing a stopper for the second gear 352 at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted through the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

  A drive motor 340 is disposed on the back surface of the gear attachment portion 312 at a position corresponding to the concave portion in which the third gear 353 is accommodated. The drive motor 340 is disposed with its drive shaft 340a protruding in front of the gear mounting portion 312 (in the recess in which the third gear 353 is accommodated), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. The

  The electrical decoration base 320 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a substrate portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted on the front side, and a front surface of the substrate portion 321 and a plurality of front surfaces of the substrate portion 321 are provided. And a partition portion 322 that partitions the region.

  In detail, the partition part 322 has a predetermined interval between the ribs 322a and 322b, and the inner edge rib 322a and the outer edge rib 322b which are annular in front view and extend along the inner edge and the outer edge of the substrate part 321. An intermediate rib 322c that is concentrically formed in a front view and a plurality of radiating ribs 322d that extend radially outward from the center of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a grid pattern. Arranged. The plurality of radiation ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electric decoration base 320 is divided into a total of 24 regions, 12 on the inner peripheral side and 12 on the outer peripheral side by the partitioning portion 322, and each of the partitioned regions includes One or two LEDs 321a are disposed. Accordingly, when each LED 321a is individually turned on or blinked, the difference in brightness between the area associated with the illumination or blinking and the area not associated with can be increased, and as a result, the production effect is enhanced. be able to.

  The rotary member 330 includes a rotary main body 331 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 extending in the axial direction from the outer edge of the rotary main body 331, which are light transmissive. It is integrally formed from a compatible resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed at the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and the fixing member 360 is accommodated in the opening of the rotating body 331 in the assembled state (see FIG. 14).

  Fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) on the back surface of the rotating body 331. The to-be-fastened portion 333 is a portion to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating body 331 (the rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened (a concave portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner periphery). They are arranged at the same distance from the center of 331 and at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  A plurality of annular protrusions 331a to 331e that are formed in an annular shape in front view and are concentrically arranged on the front surface of the rotating body 331, and radiate radially outward from the centers of the annular protrusions 331a to 331e. A plurality of radiation projections 331f extending in a straight line are projected. The plurality of radiation protrusions 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential interval of the radiation projections 331f is matched with the circumferential interval of the radiation ribs 322d of the electrical decoration base 320.

  The rotary main body 331 is formed to have a uniform thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and the portion where the annular projections 331a to 331e or the radiation projection 331f are projected is thicker by the projected amount ( (Thickness dimension) is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit light at the portion where the protrusions 331a to 331f are provided.

  In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partition member 322 is located at the position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331e located at the radially outermost position (the position overlapping in the front view), and the annular protrusion 331d. Next, the intermediate ribs 322c of the partition members 322 are respectively arranged at positions that are located radially outward and corresponding to the positions between the annular protrusions 331d and 331c (positions that overlap in front view). .

  Thus, since the area | region corresponding to each area | region divided by the division member 322 of the electrical decoration base 320 is divided by each protrusion 331a-331f in the rotation member 330, each LED321a of the electrical decoration base 320 is shown. When the lights are individually turned on or blinked, the difference in brightness between the areas associated with the lights and blinks and the areas not associated with can be increased, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  As described above, the division of the region is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusion 331f from the front and increasing the thickness dimension as described above. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to perform printing for partitioning the area in front of the rotating member 330 or dispose another member, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed in a single color, thereby reducing the product cost. Not only can be improved, but the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  In the rotating member 330, the inner diameter of the outer wall portion 332 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the electric decoration base 320. It is set as the structure by which the division member 322 of the electrical decoration base 320 is fitted by the circumference side. Thereby, it can suppress that the light of LED321a leaks from the outer peripheral side of the division member 322, and can perform light irradiation to the front side efficiently. In addition, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partition member 322 is fitted in the outer wall portion 332, so that the inner fitting state is achieved by setting the inner fitting state. Can be rotated relative to each other. In other words, each of the fastened portions 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with each of the fastening seat portions 351d (insertion holes) of the first gear 351 by simply rotating both of them, and the radial position can be adjusted. Therefore, the workability can be improved accordingly.

  The first gear 351 has an opening in the center, and a first body 351a having an annular shape in front view in which the fixing member 360 can be inserted into the opening, and teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first body 351a 351b, a first flange portion 351c projecting in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the teeth 351b, and a third flange portion thereof A plurality (three in this embodiment) of fastening seat portions 351d projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the 351c, and the first main body 351a. And a guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19) through which the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted, and the fixing member 360 is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. In, rotatably held between its fixing member 360 and the gear attachment portion 312.

  Since the first gear 351 is formed by extending the first flange portion 351c from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a, the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c is connected to the axial end surface of the tooth 351b, the rigidity of the tooth 351b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and to improve the durability of the teeth 351b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, as will be described later, the first flange portion 351c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off, and accordingly, parts for retaining can be omitted and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  The fastening seat portion 351d is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating body 331 (the rotating member 330), and is disposed at a position corresponding to each fastened portion 333 of the rotating body 331. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion holes are the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It is disposed at a position that is unequally spaced in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at one phase position. Therefore, when the rotating member 330 is assembled to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position. Can be avoided.

  In order to allow the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 to be fastened and fixed only at one phase position, the insertion holes of the fastening seat portions 351 are not necessarily located at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It does not need to be arranged. The insertion holes of the fastening seat portions 351 may be arranged at positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction and that are different in distance from the center of the rotating body 331.

  However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the insertion holes of the respective fastening seat portions 351 are disposed at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the length dimension (extension length) of each fastening seat portion 351d can be made the same, when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, the moldability can be improved. is there.

Here, in order to fasten and fix the fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 through the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d, it is necessary to form an opening 311a in the case body 310. There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement trajectories of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly. However, according to the present embodiment, the movement trajectory of each insertion hole can be made the same, so that the opening width of the opening 311a can be minimized.

The second gear 352 includes a second main body 352a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 352b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c formed in the center of the second main body 352a. The shaft portion 318 of the gear attachment portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c, so that the gear attachment portion 312 is rotatably held in a state of being engaged with the first gear 351.

  The third gear 353 includes a third main body 353a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the front side of the third gear 353 with respect to the teeth 353b (the rotating member 330). And a third flange portion 353c projecting in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a at a position of the third main body 353a, and the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 370 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held on the drive shaft 340 a of the drive motor 340 while being engaged with the two gears 352.

  Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is the first. The first gear 351 is rotated by being transmitted to the first gear 351. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotating member 330 fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotating member 330 is rotated.

  As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed by projecting the third flange portion 353c from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and thus the third gear 353 is formed by the third flange portion 353c. The rigidity of can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, the third flange portion 353c is connected to the axial end surface of the tooth 353b, so that the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and to improve the durability of the teeth 353b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, as will be described later, the third flange portion 353c also serves to prevent the second gear 352 from coming off, and accordingly, parts for retaining can be omitted and the cost of parts can be reduced.

  The fixing member 360 is a columnar member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear attachment portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The receiving port 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning port 64 when mounted on the game board 13, and guides the ball that has flowed from the first winning port 64 to the passing port 314 of the gear mounting portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw that fastens or inserts the fixing member 360 into the fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear attachment portion 312.

  FIG. 18A is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the fixing member 360. 18A shows a state in which the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 are disposed in the case body 310, and one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is illustrated. The part is partly viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage port 314 formed in the gear attachment portion 312 of the case body 310 is downward from the center of the first gear 351 as described above (FIG. 18 ( a) Displaced (eccentric) to the lower side). For this reason, the gear mounting portion 312 has an annular region formed around the passage opening 314 in which the upper width dimension of the passage opening 314 (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18A) is smaller than the lower width dimension. Widened.

  Similarly, with respect to the fixing member 360 inserted into the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is downward (from the center of the fixing member 360 ( In FIG. 18B (lower side), it is displaced (eccentric). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the receiving port 361, the fixing member 360 has a wider width dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 18 (b)) than the lower width dimension. Is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage port 314 and the receiving port 361 are displaced (eccentric) to form a wide (increased width dimension) part of the periphery (annular region). Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are respectively arranged (perforated) in the widened portion, a large-diameter hole can be perforated by making effective use of the limited space. And the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be ensured.

  In other words, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or 42) of the second combined operation unit 600 can be inserted. This is a part, and since the supporting weight increases, a large-diameter fastening screw is inserted, so it needs to be formed as a relatively large-diameter hole. By forming the enlarged portion, it is possible to efficiently secure a space for making a large-diameter hole by using the portion. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is drilled, the hole is drilled in a partially widened region, so that rigidity can be ensured.

  FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a support structure of the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, and corresponds to the view in the arrow XIX direction of FIG. In FIG. 19, the case body 310 is viewed in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide convex portion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into a guide concave portion 351e that is recessed on the back side. The Further, the first gear 351 is restricted from falling off from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19) by a fixing member 360 fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340 a of the drive motor 340. Note that examples of the fixing method include press-fitting and an adhesive.

  The second gear 352 has the teeth 352b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 of the third gear 353 when the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second main body 352a. , 353b and is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312.

  In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 include the first flange portion 351c and the third flange that project radially outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first main body 351a and the third main body 353a. The portions 353c are formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c are extended to a position overlapping the end surface in the axial direction of the second gear 352. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the second gear 352 from coming out from the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, there is no need to dispose a retaining part at the tip of the shaft portion 318, and accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced and the part cost can be reduced. Further, at the time of assembling, the second gear 352 can be simply inserted through the shaft hole 352c of the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 and the step of attaching the retaining component can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 abut against the second gear 352 at two different locations, the second gear 352 is axially moved. It is possible not only to reliably control the escape, but also to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while being inclined with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, the meshing state of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b and 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 can be made appropriate to improve transmission efficiency and durability. In particular, since the two locations in contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions where the phases differ by about 180 degrees, the above-described effects can be exhibited more remarkably. The two phases are preferably set within a range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

  Here, it is sufficient that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 are projected to the mountain top side from the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because if it protrudes beyond the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353, it can come into contact with the end face on the mountain top side of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352. Moreover, it is because the material required for formation of the 1st flange part 351c and the 3rd flange part 353c can be suppressed, and weight reduction and reduction of material cost can be aimed at. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c protrude further outward in the radial direction than the crests of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be more reliably suppressed.

  Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The composite operation unit 400 includes the four members (operation members 491 and 492) as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) each of these members (operation members 491 and 492). It consists of four units. That is, in the front view of the back case 210, the composite operation unit 400 is arranged in two units arranged in the vertical direction on the left side of the opening 211a, and 2 arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the opening 211a. Consists of two units. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) each member (the operation members 491, 492) is the same in the four units, one unit of these four units will be described below. (A unit disposed on the upper right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be referred to as a combined operation unit 400.

  FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the combined operation unit 400, operating members 491 and 492 are disposed on the front side of the mounting base 410, and the operating members 491 and 492 perform opening / closing operations and rotating operations in combination (see FIG. 20). 27). In other words, the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged to face each other with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other, and an operation (opening / closing operation) for enlarging / reducing the facing interval and a base side arranged on the mounting base 410 are arranged. An operation that rotates about the center (rotation operation) is formed to be executable. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is disposed on the front surface of the mounting base 410.

  In the present embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening / closing operation and rotation operation) of the operation members 491 and 492 can be executed by one drive motor 430. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the drive motor 430 separately for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. A detailed configuration of such a structure will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 when the combined operation unit 400 is viewed from the front. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400 in a state in which a part of the composite operation unit 400 is disassembled. The configuration shown on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed from the front and shown on the right side of FIG. The configuration is viewed from the back. 21 and 22, the illustration of the decorative member 411 is omitted, and the illustration of the attachment base 410 is omitted in FIG. 22.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the composite operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 disposed on the back case 210 (see FIG. 7), a holding case 420 attached to the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420. A plurality of gears rotatably supported by the motor, a drive motor 430 that generates a driving force for rotating the plurality of gears, and a back arm whose base end is rotatably supported by the holding case 420 A body 471 and a front arm body 472, a slide rack member 481, a first pinion leg member 482, a second pinion leg member 483, and a second pinion leg member 483, which are disposed between the opposing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Operation members 491 and 492 mainly connected to the tips of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are mainly provided.

  The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 attached to the attachment base 410 and a front case body 422 disposed to face the front side of the back case body 421. The back case body 421 and the front case body 422 A plurality of gears are rotatably supported in an internal space formed between the opposing surfaces.

  In the holding case 420, a drive motor 430 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 421, and three rotating shafts (a reduction shaft 425, a first shaft) are provided between the back case body 421 and the front case body 422. The first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are respectively installed in a posture parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported from the reduction shaft 425 to the second shaft 427. A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

  The plurality of gears are a reduction gear 441 supported by a reduction shaft 425, an opening / closing first gear 451 and a rotation first gear 461 supported by a first shaft 426, and an opening / closing supported by a second shaft 427. It consists of a second gear 452 and a rotating second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b formed coaxially with the large-diameter gear 441a and transmits the rotation of the pinion gear 431 to the opening / closing first gear 451 while decelerating the rotation. . Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening / closing first gear 451, the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the first open / close gear 451, the second open / close gear 452, the first rotation gear 461, and the second rotation gear 462. The opening / closing first gear 451 is formed on the outer periphery of the main body 451a around the main body 451a, the insertion hole 451b formed through the main body 451a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and the insertion hole 451b as a center. Teeth 451c to be provided, a pair of connecting projections 451d protruding from the axial end face (front) of the main body 451a and sandwiching the insertion hole 451b, and penetratingly formed in the main body 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. A positioning hole 451e.

The rotating first gear 461 is a gear that is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing first gear 451 and is supported by the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) together with the opening / closing first gear 451, and the main body portion 461a. An insertion hole 461b formed through the main body 461a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted; a tooth 461c engraved on a part of the outer periphery of the main body 461a around the insertion hole 461b; and a main body 451a And a pair of connecting holes 461d positioned between the insertion holes 461b, and a detected portion 461e that is formed to project radially outward from the outer periphery of the main body 451a and is detected by an optical sensor.
The main body 461a of the first rotating gear 461 has a cylindrical surface (hereinafter referred to as the outer peripheral surface of the region excluding the region where the tooth 461c is formed (that is, the tooth 461c is not formed) centered on the axis of the insertion hole 461b. (Referred to as “cylindrical surface 461a1”). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (the distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the root circle of the tooth 461c. Thereby, as will be described later, it is possible to improve both the rigidity of the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461 and the rigidity of the non-formation surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotating second gear 462.

  In addition, a pair of connecting projections 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 are formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so as to be fitted inside, respectively, and the inner fitting rotates with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. The rotational position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and rotated integrally in the same phase.

  The opening / closing second gear 452 is formed in a part of the outer periphery of the main body 452a with the main body 452a, an insertion hole 452b formed through the main body 452a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and the insertion hole 452b as a center. It includes a tooth 452c provided, a connecting protrusion 452d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 452a, and a positioning hole 452e formed through the main body 452a.

  The opening / closing second gear 452 is arranged with the back arm body 471 sandwiched between the back case body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471) and is pivotally supported by the back arm body 471. The insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by a cylindrical portion standing along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Further, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 through this connection (FIG. 26).

  The rotating second gear 462 is formed in a part of the outer periphery of the main body 462a with the main body 462a, an insertion hole 462b formed through the main body 462a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and the insertion hole 462b as a center. Teeth 462c provided, a pair of connecting projections 462d protruding from the axial end face (front surface) of the main body 462a and having a hole formed therein, and a positioning hole 462e formed through the main body 452a. Is provided.

  The main body 462a of the rotating second gear 462 is connected to both sides of the teeth 462c and the outer peripheral surface of the region where the teeth are not formed (hereinafter referred to as “non-formed surface 462a1”) is on the side of the insertion hole 462b. It is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward (ie, having a center of curvature on the radially outward side). Specifically, the curvature of the non-forming surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

  The rotating second gear 462 is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing second gear 452 (at a position superimposed in the axial direction), but is independent from the opening / closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). The second shaft 427 is pivotally supported in a state in which the relative rotation is possible. Further, the second rotating gear 462 is connected to the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e of the front arm body 472 by fastening the fastening screws inserted through the holes of the connecting protrusions 462d. The two are linked together. Therefore, the second rotation gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase through the connection.

  Thus, since the connection protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connection protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462, both are connected via the connection protrusions 462d and 472e. The rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of locations (two locations in the present embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotating second gear 462 can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

  Here, as will be described later, the rotating second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (see FIG. 28 to FIG. 30), it is necessary to ensure rigidity to resist the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the rotating second gear 462 is thickened, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost increases.

  On the other hand, according to the rotating second gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be utilized (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) to increase the rigidity. There is no need to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a highly rigid material. Thereby, the durability of the rotating second gear 462 can be improved while reducing the weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462.

  In particular, the rotation second gear 462 has a connecting projection 462d that faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotation first gear 461 with the non-formation surface 462a1 sandwiched between the non-formation surface 462a1 and the non-formation surface 462a1. 28 to 30), as described later, when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the rotating first gear The rigidity of the portion of the 461 that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or a metal fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462 and improvement in its durability.

  Further, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotation first gear 461 is rotated by the unit rotation angle, the rotation angle at which the rotation second gear 462 is rotated is the same as the unit rotation angle, and the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated. When the rotation is performed, the rotation angle of the rotation second gear 462 coincides with the rotation angle.

  Returning to FIG. 21 and FIG. In the assembled state, the large-diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430, and the open / close first gear 451 is meshed with the small-diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441. The opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing second gear 451, and the rotating second gear 462 is meshed with the rotating first gear 461 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the open / close first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the open / close first gear 451 is rotated.

  In this case, as described above, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the internal fitting of the connecting protrusion 451d to the connecting hole 461d, so that they can rotate integrally in the same phase. Is done. That is, when the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation first gear 461 is also rotated by the rotation, the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the rotation of the rotating first gear 461 is rotated. Each is transmitted to the second gear 462.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent from each other and can be relatively rotated at different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, the rotation driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452 while the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated by the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430, and the rotation first The two gears 462 can form a state where the rotational driving force is interrupted. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening / closing operation is executed. Details of the structure and operation will be described later.

  Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the back case body 421 on the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, positioning holes 410a and 410b are formed through the mounting base 410 so as to correspond to the positioning holes 421a and 421b. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a is disposed at a position where the positioning hole 410a communicates with the positioning hole 421a and the positioning hole 410b communicates with the positioning hole 421b.

  In this embodiment, a cylindrical jig is inserted into the positioning holes 421a and 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e, and 462e of the gears 451, 452, and 462, respectively, so that the gears 451 and 452 with respect to the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462, and the phase (rotation position) between the rotation first gear 461 and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation second gear 462 and the opening / closing second gear 452. it can. The positioning method will be described later.

  The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the rotation second gear 462 together with the front arm body 472 to the operation members 491 and 492 to rotate the operation members 491 and 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality (four in this embodiment) of through holes 471b through which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted, a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion A plurality of (four in this embodiment) shaft portions 471c that pivotally support the leg members 483 and a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section are linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471. A guide groove 471d, and a positioning hole 471e formed to penetrate the shaft support hole 471a.

  Note that a collar 427 a disposed in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471 a, so that the back arm body 471 can rotate around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case body 421. The In addition, the cylindrical portion that forms the shaft support hole 471a by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening / closing gear 452, and the second opening / closing gear 452 can be rotated by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. Is pivotally supported.

  The positioning hole 471e is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 462 of the rotating second gear 462 and the positioning hole 452e of the open / close second gear 452. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471, and when the rotating second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 is combined. The phase (position of rotation about the second shaft 427) of the positioning hole 471e and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462 coincide with each other. On the other hand, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471 so that the insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported. The opening / closing second gear 452 is centered around the shaft supporting portion. When the relative rotation with respect to 471 is arranged at a predetermined rotational position, the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is in relation to the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462. The phases (rotational positions around the second axis 427) are matched.

  The front arm body 472 can be fastened to the tip by a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted and a fastening screw that protrudes toward the back arm body 471 and is inserted through the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) raised fastening portions 472b, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) receiving recesses 472c that are recesses capable of receiving the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section. A guide groove 472d that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472 as a concave groove, and a coupling protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 that is disposed with the shaft support hole 472a interposed therebetween ( And a connecting protrusion 472e that is fastened and fixed).

  A collar 422a disposed in the front case body 422 is inserted into the shaft support hole 472a, so that the front arm body 472 can rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. The That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotating second gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the rotating second gear 462 receives the rotational driving force from the rotating first gear 461 and receives the second driving force. When rotated about the shaft 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) are also rotated about the second shaft 427 together with the rotating second gear 462.

  The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are fastened to the raised fastening portion 472 of the front arm body 472 by fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 471b of the back arm body 471, so that the front and front arms of the back arm body 471 The body 472 is coupled in a posture in which the back surface of the body 472 is opposed to each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the opposing surfaces (front and back). Therefore, it is possible to displace the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 using this gap.

  The slide rack member 481 transmits the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to the operation members 491 and 492, and opens and closes the operation members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27), and is formed at a longitudinal main body portion 481a, a rack portion 481b formed as a rack gear on the left and right sides of the main body portion 481a, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a. A connection groove 481c and a guide convex portion 481d that protrudes in a substantially rectangular cross section from the front and rear surfaces of the main body portion 481 and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

  As described above, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove through which the connecting protrusion 452d of the open / close second gear 452 is inserted. The connecting protrusion 452d has a slidable groove width and has a main body 481. It extends in a straight line along the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction. In the assembled state, the slide rack member 481 has its guide convex portion 481d inserted in the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 is slidable relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). Direction) (see FIG. 26).

  The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 include main body portions 482a and 483a, shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portions 482a and 483a, and shaft support holes 482b. , 483b, and gear portions 482c, 483c formed as pinion gears, and connecting holes 482d, 483d formed through the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portions 482a, 483a. The gear portions 482c and 483c are disposed on both the left and right sides of the 481 in a state where they are engaged with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481.

  In the assembled state, the shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes through which the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 is inserted, and thereby, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are The shaft support holes 482b and 483b (shaft portions 471c) are rotatable about the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion are engaged via the meshing of the rack part 481b and the gear parts 482c and 483c. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

  A plurality (four in this embodiment) of the operation members 491 and 492 are formed so as to protrude from the back side of the operation members 491 and 492 so as to be inserted into the connection holes 482d and 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483. ) Raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so that fastening screws can be fastened. Therefore, the projecting tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are inserted into the coupling holes 482d and 483d, and the fastening screws are fastened to the projecting tips from the side opposite to the insertion direction, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 The operation members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

  The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed with rib-like portions protruding on the outer peripheral surface excluding the protruding tips, and the end surfaces of the rib-like portions are the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion. It abuts on the front surface of the leg member 483. Accordingly, the operation members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protruding height of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in the structure in which the front arm body 472 is disposed between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, the second pinion leg member 483, and the operation members 491 and 492, the front arm body 472 interferes with the front arm body 472. The opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be performed without this.

  An urging spring 484 made of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in an elastically tensioned state, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 484 is applied to the pair of first pinion leg members 482. The first pinion leg members 482 are configured to act in directions close to each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening / closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are brought into close contact with each other using the urging force of the urging spring 484 so that a gap is formed. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, a positioning method of the opening / closing first gear 451, the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 will be described. In the description of the positioning method, FIGS. 21 to 23 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIGS. 24 and 25 illustrate the steps of assembling the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in time series. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a combined operation unit 400. In FIG. 24A, the state in which the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425 is opened and closed with respect to the first shaft 426 in FIG. 24B with respect to the state shown in FIG. In the state where the first gear 451 is assembled, in FIG. 25A, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are further assembled to the second shaft 427 with respect to the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 25B shows the state where the rotation first gear 461 is further assembled to the first shaft 426 with respect to the state shown in FIG. 25A.

  Here, as described above, the combined operation unit 400 transmits the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 to the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 in order via the reduction gear 441, thereby opening and closing the second opening / closing gear. The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452 to open and close the operation members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is transmitted through the reduction gear 441 to the first rotary gear 461 and the second rotary gear 462. , The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated by the rotation of the rotation second gear 462, and the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated.

  Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening / closing operation and the rotating operation of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, avoiding the occurrence of interference between members and displacement of the moving range), the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. The rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the rotation and the rotation position of the rotation second gear 462 with respect to the rotation first gear 461 are positioned at predetermined rotation positions, and the gears 451 to 462 are held by the holding case. 420 needs to be assembled to each.

  However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to assemble these gears after positioning the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear, the operator must rotate both gears. Since it was necessary to adjust the position visually and assemble, the work was complicated, and the work efficiency was not only poor, but there was a risk of assembly failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotational positions (phase, meshing position) of the open / close second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 with respect to the open / close first gear 451 and the rotary first gear 461, and the respective A positioning structure for positioning the mounting positions (phases) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided, and when the gears 451 to 462 are assembled to the holding case 420 by using this positioning structure, While improving the workability, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly failure.

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425 and meshed with the pinion gear 431. As described above, since the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421 are communicated with the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410, respectively, the positioning holes 410a from the back side of the mounting base 410. 410b are inserted through jigs (not shown), and the jigs are projected from the positioning holes 421a and 421b to the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a cylindrical body having a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a and the like.

  Next, the open / close first gear 451 is assembled (supported) to the first shaft 426 while the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the open / close first gear 451. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24B, the opening / closing first gear 451 is engaged with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening / closing first gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. .

  While maintaining the state of positioning relative to the back case body 421 (the state where the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening / closing first gear 451), the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are then moved to the first position. It is assembled (supported) on the two shafts 427.

  The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are operated in a state of being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 has the insertion hole 452 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471, and the rotating second gear 462 has the connection protrusion 462d connected to the connection protrusion 472e of the front arm body 472. The second opening / closing gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are interposed between the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 facing each other. Further, the jig inserted through the positioning hole 421b of the back case 421 protrudes from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted into the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462.

  In this case, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are assembled to the second shaft 427 by using a jig protruding from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421, the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471, and the opening / closing first. The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427 while being sequentially inserted through the positioning hole 452e of the second gear 452 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 25A, the opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing first gear 451, and the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. Can be positioned, and the attachment position (phase) of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

  Finally, while maintaining the state of positioning relative to the back case body 421 (at least the state where the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), the opening / closing operation supported by the first shaft 426 is finally performed. The rotating first gear 461 is assembled (supported) on the first shaft 426 while the connecting protrusion 451d of the first gear 451 is inserted into the connecting hole 461d of the rotating first gear 461. Thus, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rotating first gear 461 is engaged with the rotating second gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is positioned. Can do.

  After the rotating first gear 461 is attached to (supported by) the first shaft 426, the jig is removed from the back side of the back case body 421. Thereby, the assembly (axial support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427) is completed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the jigs are erected in parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and the gears are inserted through the positioning holes 451e and the like. By assembling (shaft-supporting) 451 to 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in order, the rotational positions (phases and meshing positions) of the gears 451 to 462 are positioned with the back case body 421 as a reference. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time as the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling work and the positioning work can be performed at the same time, thereby improving the workability. Can be planned.

  In particular, with respect to the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is formed as a through hole, so that the second shaft of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 is formed. Assembly to 427 (shaft support) can be performed simultaneously. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the open / close second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Can be assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427. Accordingly, it is not necessary to position and assemble the arm bodies 471 and 472 and the gears 452 and 462, and the positioning work can be completed by a single assembling work, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare dedicated jigs for the open / close second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the front arm body 472, and a common jig is used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore,
The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be able to rotate relative to each other independently. However, if the jig is removed to the back side of the back case body 421, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear are required. 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate rotation shaft for each of the open / close second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462, and the open / close second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are used as a common rotary shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be pivotally supported, the product cost can be reduced from this point.

  On the other hand, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and integrally rotatable in the same phase. In this case, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are inserted (internally fitted) through the pair of connecting projections 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. These gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other so that positioning of the rotational position (phase) and integral rotation in the same phase can be performed simultaneously. In other words, the positioning of the rotational positions (phases) of the two gears 451 and 461 and the connection of the two gears 451 and 461 for integral rotation can be shared by the connection protrusion 451d and the communication hole 461d. There is no need to individually provide a through hole for positioning the position (that is, through the jig) and a connection structure for integral rotation. Thereby, the shape of both the gears 451 and 461 can be simplified, and the production yield can be improved. Further, since the number of through holes formed so as to penetrate through the first rotating gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be suppressed, rigidity can be ensured correspondingly and durability can be improved.

  In particular, the rotation first gear 461 is formed with a pair of communication holes 461d as through holes, and the pair of communication holes 461d are inserted (internally fitted) into the pair of connection projections 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451. Therefore, the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main body 461a) can be improved by the fitting structure.

  Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, a jig is protruded from the front surface of the back case body 421 and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially arranged while positioning the rotational position using the jig. When assembled to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 (supported), the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling each gear 451-462, while maintaining the state where the jig is inserted into the positioning holes 451e-462e of the already-assembled gears 451-462 of the gears 451-462, The remaining gears 451 to 461 among the gears 451 to 462 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from inadvertently rotating the already assembled gears 451 to 461 during work, so that workability can be improved and the reliability of the positioned rotational position can be improved. It is possible to improve the performance.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are coaxially disposed on the first shaft 426, and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are coaxially disposed on the second shaft 427, respectively. Therefore, the backlash between the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. . As a result, as will be described later, when the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 are performed (see FIGS. 27 to 30), it is possible to suppress the production timing from being shifted.

  Next, the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (a) to 26 (c) are exploded front views of the combined operation unit 400 for explaining the relative displacement state of the open / close second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. A state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. 26 (a) shows the opening / closing second gear 452 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 26 (b), and FIG. 26 (c) shows opening / closing with respect to FIG. 26 (b). This corresponds to the state in which the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise).

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), the cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the open / close second gear 452. Thus, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotatable relative to the back case 271 about the second shaft 427.

  As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are urged toward each other by the urging force of the urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) installed between them. A shaft support hole 482b is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the right side in FIG. 26B of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft portion 471c. While being rotated (counterclockwise), the first pinion leg member 482 located on the left side of FIG. 26 (b) is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 has the guide recesses 471d and 472d (FIGS. 21 and 22) of the both arm bodies 471 and 472 by the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482. (See FIG. 26B, the direction away from the open / close second gear 452).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26B, in the state where the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 slides. The distance between the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26B) is drawn to the distance L1 by the rack member 481 (lower side in FIG. 26B). . Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the interval between the connecting holes 482d is the interval W1.

  From the state shown in FIG. 26B, for example, when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting protrusion 452d is By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d moves upward (upward in FIG. 26A) against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace the slide.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26A). Is reduced to a distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. As the slide rack member 481 slides upward, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction away from each other, and the interval between the connecting holes 482d is enlarged to be the interval W2. (W1 <W2).

  The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is the same as the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26B, the postures close to each other (the distance between the connecting holes 483d). 26 (a), and in the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), as the slide rack member 481 slides upward, the postures are separated from each other (the interval between the connecting holes 483d is the maximum). Arranged).

  When the open / close second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26A, the state shown in FIG. Returned to When the open / close second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26B, the connecting projection 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d slides upward (upward in FIG. 26C) against the biasing force of the biasing spring 484. Displace. Thus, as in the case shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the open / close second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotational position, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the direction of the slide displacement (FIG. 26 (c) ) The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the vertical direction) is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. The As the slide rack member 481 slides upward, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg members 483) are rotated in a direction away from each other, and between the connecting holes 482d. The interval is enlarged to be the interval W2 (W1 <W2).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, the rotation operation and the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 by the composite operation unit 400 will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (d) are front views of the composite operation unit 400 illustrating the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in time series. In FIG. 27A, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the raised position U and opened, and in FIG. 27B, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the raised position U and closed. In FIG. 27C, the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and closed, and in FIG. 27D, the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and Each opened state is illustrated.

  28 to 30 are composite operation units schematically showing the meshing state of the first open / close gear 451 and the second gear 452 and the meshed state of the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462, respectively. 400 is a schematic front view of 400. FIG. 28A shows the state shown in FIG. 27A, FIGS. 28B and 29A show the state shown in FIG. 27B, and FIG. 29B shows the state shown in FIGS. FIG. 29 (c) and FIG. 30 (a) correspond to the state of FIG. 27 (c), and FIG. 30 (b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 27 (d), respectively. To do. FIGS. 28 (b) and 29 (a) and FIGS. 29 (c) and 30 (a) show the same state.

  Here, in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, one connection protrusion 451 d of the pair of connection protrusions 451 d of the opening / closing first gear 451 and one connection hole of the pair of connection holes 461 d of the rotating first gear 461. 461d is shown with hatching, and the hatched connecting projection 451d and connecting hole 461d will be described as a reference for rotation angles θ0 to θ4 described later. That is, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 462 are inserted (internally fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d by the hatched connecting projection 451d, and these are arranged at the same rotational position.

  Also, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the rotation of the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 when the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The rotational angle θ0 is the rotational position of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotational first gear 461 when the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the raised position U and are closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). The first opening / closing gear in the state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed between the raised position U and the lowered position D and are closed (the state between FIGS. 27B and 27C). 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated at the rotational angle θ2, and the first opening / closing gear 451 in a state where the operating members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27C). The rotation position of the first rotation gear 461 is the rotation angle θ3, the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation in the state where the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27D). The rotational position of the first gear 461 is defined as a rotational angle θ4.

  As shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, when the rotation positions of the first opening / closing gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operation members 491 and 492 are at the raised position U. Arranged and opened. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) to the predetermined rotation position around the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. As the distance between the two is shortened to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is slid and displaced upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (the state shown in FIG. 26C).

  In this case, the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 are in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the rotation first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the main body 462a of the rotation second gear 462. . As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centered on the first shaft 426, and the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b side (that is, has a center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side), and has the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or slightly. It is formed as a curved surface with a small curvature (ie a slightly larger radius).

  Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around the center. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 serve as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operation members 491 and 492 at the raised position U). Can function.

  Here, a conventional gaming machine includes an operation member that is rotatably arranged, and a drive motor that applies a rotational drive force to the operation member, and the operation member is rotated by a predetermined amount by the rotational drive force of the drive motor. There is something to rotate in the range. In this case, for example, when the end of the rotation range of the operation member is set to the ascending position and gravity is applied to the operation member disposed at the end of the rotation range, the operation member is rotated (lowered) by the action of gravity. It is necessary not to do. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the rotation (lowering) of the operation member is regulated by causing the driving force of the drive motor to oppose gravity (the weight of the operation member) (that is, the operation member is held at the end of the rotation range). ) Because of the structure, the energy consumption required for holding the operating member was increased.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (upward position U), the rotation first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) of the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the rotation second When the non-formation surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is brought into contact, the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (the rotation of the rotation second gear 462) can be restricted. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the end of the rotation range (upward position U), the operation members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated from each other. When the operating members 491 and 492 cannot be held at the raised position U by using the rotational driving force, the operating members 491 and 492 are moved to the raised position U by utilizing the contact of the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. Can be retained. As a result, energy consumption required for holding the operation members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

  In this case, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) are in contact with each other (that is, the operating member 491, Rotation of the rotating second gear 462 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 can be restricted when the position 492 is arranged at the raised position U (and a lowered position D described later). Therefore, the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 around the second shaft 427 is performed only in one direction (that is, the direction in which the operating members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowered position D by the action of gravity). As compared with the case where the shape is formed in a shape that can be restricted by the above-described configuration, the vibrations of the operating members 491 and 492 when the terminal reaches the end of the movement range (upward position U (and downward position D described later)) are converged. , End of travel range The operation member 491, 492 can be positioned quickly. Furthermore, since the operation members 491 and 492 can be stably held at the end of the movement range, the operation members 491 and 492 that should be in the stop state at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later) Further, it is possible to suppress vibrations and displacement due to an external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) (that is, the operating member 491). , 492 are arranged in a raised position U (and a lowered position D, which will be described later), and are curved in an arc shape around the rotation shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotation first gear 461, The first rotating gear 461 is formed to be curved in an arc shape having the same diameter or slightly larger diameter than the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461.

  Accordingly, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be smoothly brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are smoothly brought into contact with each other, and the operation members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (upward position U (and downward position D described later)) and are stopped. The impact at the time can be reduced, and the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the rotation second gear 462 is enhanced in rigidity by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472). Therefore, there is no need to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a highly rigid material, thereby reducing the weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462 and improving the durability of the rotating second gear 462. Improvements are being made.

  In particular, as described above, the rotation second gear 462 has a position where the connecting projection 462d faces the back surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotation first gear 461 across the non-forming surface 462a1). ), When the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later). The rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first gear 461 can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462 and improvement in its durability.

  Further, the connecting projection 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is disposed at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-formed surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-formation surface 462a1 is disposed on a straight line connecting the connection protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. When the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 is brought into contact. Since the reaction force received from the first and second shafts acts along a straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426, the second rotating gear rotates at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461. By providing the connecting protrusion 462d of 462, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1) can be further exhibited using the front arm body 472. Further, since a metal fastening screw is inserted through the rolling convex portion 462d, the rigidity can be increased also in this respect.

  When the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are rotated integrally from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1 in the same phase from the state shown in FIGS. Since the first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 cause slippage (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462, the rotating first gear 461 Rotational driving force is not transmitted from 461 to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) are not rotated. Accordingly, the operating members 491 and 492 can be held at the raised position U without rotating the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, assuming that the rotating operation is stopped).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotating first gear 461, and the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is opposed to the cylindrical surface 461a1, so 1 is a structure in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462, the rigidity of the rotating first gear 462 can be improved.

  That is, even when the tooth 461c is formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the tooth tip surface of the tooth 461c. The above-described blocking state can be formed by sliding (sliding) facing each other. However, in this case, as the teeth 461c are formed (recessed), the rigidity of the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the region facing the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (the teeth 451c are not formed), and accordingly, the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is correspondingly formed. The rigidity of the can be improved.

  Further, when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461. It is necessary to be retracted to the second shaft 427 side from the tooth tip surface. As a result, the amount of retraction at the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed becomes large, and accordingly, the rigidity is reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating first gear 461 is formed with the cylindrical surface 461a1, and, as described above, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is between the tooth tip surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c. Therefore, the retraction amount of the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced. Thereby, the protrusion amount of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation part of the rotation second gear 462 is ensured (suppressing the amount of retraction), and the rigidity of the non-formation surface 462a1 formation part in the rotation second gear 462. Can be improved.

  In particular, as described above, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 side (that is, has a center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side), and has teeth 462c. Since it is shaped to protrude toward the front (rotation first gear 461 side) as it is spaced apart from the circumferential direction (that is, the distance from the second shaft 427 increases), the cylindrical surface of the rotation first gear 461 While enabling sliding with respect to 461a1 (formation of a cut-off state), the amount of protrusion at the non-formation surface 462a1 formation portion of the rotating second gear 462 can be increased to further increase its rigidity.

  Since the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 are engaged with the teeth 451c, 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are engaged. Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 toward the rotation angle θ1, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is connected to the back arm body 471 and The front arm body 472 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the second shaft 427 as a center.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is increased to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). Thereby, as shown in FIG.27 (b), FIG.28 (b), and FIG.29 (a), the open | released operation members 491 and 492 can be made into the closed state. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the raised position U, the opened and closed operating members 491 and 492 can be closed by performing an opening / closing operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491, 492 are moved to the raised position U. The closed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are closed. 462c is in a state immediately before the engagement.

  Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B, and FIG. 29A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. When the first gear 461 and the second gear 462 rotate, the teeth 461c and 462c of the first gear 461 and the second gear 462 are engaged with each other, so that the first gear 460 is rotated. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, and the rotation second gear 462 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the second shaft 427 together with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B, the operation members 491 and 492 can be rotated from the ascending position U to the descending position D.

  On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ1 toward the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotation second gear 462 are similarly the same. It is rotated integrally with the phase. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the rotating second gear 462 and the back arm body 471 and The front arm body 472 is integrally rotated around the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 can be stopped (the operation members 491, 492 can be held closed).

  As a result, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the rotating members perform the rotating operation while holding the operation members 491, 492 in the closed state, thereby opening and closing the first opening / closing gear. When the gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the raised position U are moved to the lowered position D as shown in FIG. 27 (c) and FIG. 29 (c). Can be arranged.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), in a state where the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3, the operation members 491, 492 are moved. It is in the lowered position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 are disengaged from each other, and the rotation second gear 462 is formed on the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the rotation first gear 461. The non-forming surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a is brought into contact.

  That is, the meshing between the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is released (cannot be meshed), so that the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are disengaged. The transmission of the rotational driving force to the motor can be interrupted (formation of an interrupted state), and the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492) can be stopped.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the operation member is stopped by providing a sensor device that detects the rotation position of the gear that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor to the operation member, and the gear device moves to a predetermined rotation position by the sensor device. When it is detected that the motor has been rotated, or when the driving amount (the number of rotations or the number of steps) of the driving motor is detected (counted) and the driving amount reaches a predetermined amount, the operation members move respectively. It was determined that the end of the range was reached, and the drive motor was stopped. In this case, for example, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member has reached the end of the moving range due to, for example, a rotation position or drive amount detection failure due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and when the drive motor is not properly stopped, the movement of the operating member is regulated by the stopper. However, in the structure in which the movement of the operation member is regulated by the stopper in this way, when the operation member collides with the stopper, not only the operation member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the drive motor. This may cause damage to the drive motor.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the movement range (the lowered position D), the meshing of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is performed. It is canceled (cannot be meshed), and the transmission of the rotational driving force from the driving motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operation members 491 and 492 (the rotating second gear 462) can be blocked. Thereby, even if it is a case where the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 continues generating, the operation members 491 and 492 can be stopped.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid damage due to collision between the operation members 491 and 492 and other members. Even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the operating members 491 and 492 are disconnected from the drive motor 430 (that is, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462). Since the drive motor 430 is idling, it is possible to avoid an excessive load from acting on the drive motor 430. As will be described later, the same applies when the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated from the lowered position D toward the raised position U and reach the raised position U.

  As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462) is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around the center. That is, the stopper means that allows the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 to restrict the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, the operation members 491 and 492 can be held at the lowered position D). Can function as.

  From the state shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C, and FIG. 30A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 toward the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the first rotating gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first rotating gear 461 to the second rotating gear 462, and the second rotating gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) are not rotated. As a result, the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is not performed, and the rotating operation can be stopped (that is, the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D).

  On the other hand, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 are engaged with the teeth 451c, 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, so When the gear 461 is integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4 in the same phase, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is moved to the back arm body. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relatively around the second shaft 427 with respect to the 471 and the front arm body 472.

  As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to a distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26C). ). Thereby, as shown in FIG.27 (d) and FIG.30 (b), the operation members 491 and 492 which were closed can be made into the open state. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening and closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

  As shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, after the operation members 491 and 492 are disposed at the lowered position D and opened, the drive motor 430 (FIGS. 21 and 22) is then placed. And the first open / close gear 451 and the first rotation gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 toward the rotation angle θ0. Operations (open / close operation and rotation operation) can be executed in reverse order.

  That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 27C, 29C, and 30A, the slip between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is achieved. (Sliding) is used to stop the rotation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D), while the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). ), The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be expanded to the distance L1, and the opened operation members 491 and 492 can be closed. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening and closing operation can be executed to close the opened operating members 491 and 492.

  Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C, and FIG. 30A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase via the rotation angle θ2. To the rotation angle θ1. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 29 (a), the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, thereby operating member. 491 and 492 are rotated from the lowered position D to the raised position U, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated around the second axis 427 in the same phase. That is, it is possible to perform the rotation operation while holding the operation members 491 and 492 in the closed state, and to arrange the operation members 491 and 492 arranged at the lowered position D at the raised position U.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when starting the rotation operation for moving the operation members 491, 492 from the lowered position D toward the raised position U, only the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 is performed first. Thereafter, the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated. That is, after forming a shut-off state in which the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is blocked from being transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is changed to the rotation second gear. Since the transmission state to be transmitted to 462 is formed, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 to start the rotation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be suppressed, and as a result, the drive motor 430 can be reduced in size. be able to.

  That is, when starting the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in the stopped state (that is, the ascending position U or the descending position D), the stationary object is moved. A force exceeding the generated inertial force needs to be applied to the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 increases. In particular, the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 992 is not limited to the operating members 491 and 492, but is also a mechanism portion that opens and closes the operating members 491 and 492 (for example, the slide rack member 481 and the pinion leg members 482 and 483). Etc.) and the arm bodies 471, 472 etc. that hold the mechanism part must be moved, and the inertial force at the time of starting the rotating operation becomes large. Further, when the operating members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D are rotated toward the raised position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (the action of gravity) of the operating members 491 and 492 in addition to the inertial force. . Therefore, the drive motor 430 is increased in size.

  On the other hand, after the rotation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, the inertial action for maintaining the motion state of the operation members 491 and 492 is applied, so that the rotation required for the drive motor 430 is performed. The driving force is smaller than the rotational driving force required when starting the rotating operation of the operating members 491, 492. In other words, after the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, it can be said that the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is in use.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotational driving force is utilized by utilizing the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Is not transmitted to the rotation second gear 462 (blocking state, a state during the transition from FIG. 30B to FIG. 30A), the drive motor 430 can be driven to rotate. Momentum (inertial force on the rotating first gear 461 side) can be given to the driving state. Thereafter, the rotation first gear 461 is engaged with the rotation second gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29C to FIG. 29B). With the momentum applied to the rotational drive of the drive motor 430, the rotational motion of the operation members 491, 492 can be started. Thereby, even if the drive motor 430 is reduced in size, the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 can be started. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started.

  In particular, in this shut-off state, the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed. In the opening and closing operation, the operating members 491 and 492 are the only objects that are moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430. In addition to the operation members 491 and 492, it is not necessary to move the entire mechanism unit and the arm bodies 471 and 472 in addition to the operation members 491 and 492. For this reason, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and the drive state can be given sufficient momentum (inertial force on the rotating first gear 461 side).

  The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 are formed on both sides of the teeth 461c and 462c, and are cylindrical at two positions of the ascending position U and the descending position D. A state (blocking state) in which the non-formed surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 can be formed. Therefore, not only when the movement members 491 and 492 at the lowered position D start to move to the raised position U, but also when the movement members 491 and 492 at the raised position U start to move to the lowered position D. In addition, momentum (inertial force) can be given to the drive state of the drive motor 430.

  From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ0 in the same phase. . Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, the sliding (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is utilized. Then, while stopping the rotation of the operation members 491, 492 (that is, holding the operation members 491, 492 in the raised position U), the rotation of the open / close second gear 452 clockwise (clockwise) The distance between the connection groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be shortened to the distance L2, and the closed operation members 491 and 492 can be opened. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the raised position U, the opening and closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) rotated (rotated) around the second shaft 427, and the back Operating members 491 and 492 (second moving members) disposed on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and opened and closed (opening and closing operations) in directions close to and away from each other. ) Is stopped (see FIG. 28 and FIG. 30), while the operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member) are stopped while the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) are stopped. During the stop of the opening / closing operation, the combined operation of rotating the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) can be executed by one drive motor 430. .

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one driving motor, the driving motor generates a driving force and the driving force is stopped. Since the operation state of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched by forming two driving states, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. It is possible to form only the operation mode of performing, and it is not possible to stop the other while moving one of the first moving member or the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop one of the first moving member and the second moving member while moving the other, a driving motor for moving the first moving member and a driving motor for moving the second moving member are provided. It was necessary to provide each of them individually, that is, to provide a total of two drive motors.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation members 491 and 492 (second movement member) or one of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first movement member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode to be stopped can be achieved by one drive motor 430, the required number of the drive motors 430 is reduced while enhancing the effect of moving and stopping the operation members 491, 492, thereby reducing the product cost. Can be planned.

  Next, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the coupling position. In addition, the arrangement | positioning position (opposite space | interval) of the 1st joint operation | movement unit 500 shown in FIG.31 and FIG.32 and the 2nd joint operation | movement unit 600 is in the state in which these both units 500 and 600 were accommodated in the back case 210. This corresponds to the arrangement position (opposite interval).

  As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engagement member 539 formed so as to be movable up and down via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a link. A pair of second coupling members 630 formed so as to be able to swing left and right via a mechanism are provided, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 with a predetermined interval. A third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side of the space located between the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 (the back side in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32). Established.

  The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 move up and down and swing the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively, so that the retracted position illustrated in FIG. 31 or illustrated in FIG. Place it at the binding position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other by tilting the link mechanism, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The front side is opened (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engagement member 539 is lowered, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism. Two coupling members 630 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

  In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engagement member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right, The lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, whereby a force in a direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 approach each other is applied to the pair of second coupling members 630. Thereby, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engagement member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be brought into close contact, but also the opposing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to the left and right are in close contact with each other. Can be made. As a result, these coupling members 539 and 630 can be coupled while suppressing the formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect by combining a plurality of members.

  First, the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  33 (a) is a front view of the first combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 33 (b) is a bottom view of the first combined operation unit 500 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 33 (a). FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 35, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decoration part 560 is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first combined operation unit 500 includes a board member 510, a driving unit 520 that is disposed on the front side of the board member 510 and generates a driving force, and the driving unit 520. The slide mechanism 530 is slid up and down in the vertical direction in response to the drive force generated and the slide mechanism unit 530 is disposed on the front side of the base member 510, and the drive force of the drive unit 520 is transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530. A first link member 541 disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 and a second link member disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical to the first link member 541 542, a pair of raised members 550 disposed on the left and right sides of the front side of the substrate member 510 with the slide mechanism portion 530 interposed therebetween, and a decoration disposed on the front side of the pair of raised members 550 560, a biasing spring 571 that applies a biasing force to the second link member 542 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 mainly comprises a.

  The raising member 550 is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and the driving unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be accommodated in the internal space of the raising member 550. As a result, as described later, even when the driving unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 is effectively used. The first combined operation unit 500 can be reduced in size particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  The substrate member 510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a rack portion that is provided in parallel along a pair of guide grooves 511 and one guide groove 511 of the pair of guide grooves 511. 512, connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right sides of the pair of guide grooves 511, a shaft support hole 515 formed on the side of the connecting groove 513, and the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. And a projecting support shaft 516.

  The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to be inserted from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and allows the insertion shaft 531 c and the link members 541 and 542 to be connected on the back side of the substrate member 510. A pair of groove-like openings for extending a pair of lines in the vertical direction while maintaining parallel to each other at the substantially center in the width direction of the substrate member 510. The groove width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 531 c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and the insertion shaft 531 c can be moved only along the extending direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can be moved (lifted) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by the insertion shaft 531c being guided by the guide groove 511.

  The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512 a are formed on a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. In a state where the slide mechanism portion 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is engaged with the teeth 512a of the rack portion 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved (lifted / lowered) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven with the movement of the slide mechanism portion 530.

  The connection groove 513 is a groove shape for inserting the connection shaft 526 of the driving unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the board member 510 and connecting the connection shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the board member 510. And is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. Specifically, the connecting groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of an annular shape centering on the axis of the shaft support hole 515. The connecting groove 513 has a groove width that is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520, and allows the connecting shaft 526 to move only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  The shaft support hole 515 is an opening through which the support shaft 527 that supports the base end side of the first link member 541 is inserted, and is disposed on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connection groove 513 interposed therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is pivotally supported. It protrudes to the back side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 is pivotally supported at the base end side by a support shaft 527 protruding through a shaft support hole 515 and rotated about the support shaft 527.

  The connection groove 514 inserts the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 from the back side to the front side of the board member 510, and the end of the biasing spring 542 is formed on the locking claw 542b on the front side of the board member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for causing the guide groove 511 to be curved and extend in a convex arc shape. That is, the connecting groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw 542b to move when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

  The support shaft 516 is a shaft body for supporting the second link member 542 and the urging spring 571, and protrudes from the front side and the back side of the board member 510, as described above. The support shaft 516 is disposed at a position that is symmetric with respect to the shaft support hole 515 with an imaginary straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetric line. The second link member 542 is supported on the base end side (the shaft support hole 542a) by the support shaft 516 protruding from the back side of the substrate member 510, and is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the biasing spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 that projects from the front side of the substrate member 510.

  The biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and the coil portion is held (guided) by the support shaft 516 and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions is engaged with the second link member 542. The other arm is locked to the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510. The urging spring 571 is disposed in a state where the pair of arm portions are elastically deformed in a direction approaching each other, and the elastic recovery force pushes the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 upward (see FIG. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied in a direction to hold the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the distal end side is positioned on the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

  The driving unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for slidably moving the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction (up and down), and is on the front side of the substrate member 510 and to the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. Arranged. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. In FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting grooves 513 and the shaft support holes 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state in which the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the case body 521 and the case body 521 and drives the drive motor 522 to project the drive shaft to the back side of the case body 521 (FIGS. 34 and 35), a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotation shaft 524a that is engaged with the pinion gear 523 and protrudes from the back surface of the case body 521 so as to be rotatable. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotating shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521 And a support shaft 527 projecting from the back surface of the main body. The drive shaft of the drive motor 522, the rotation shafts 524a and 525a, the connection shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 are arranged in parallel.

  A rotating shaft 525 a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 on the crank gear 524 is disposed at a position eccentric with respect to the rotating shaft 524 a of the crank gear 524, and is connected to protrude from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a, and the connecting rod 525 constitute a crank mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating motion of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

  That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522, and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the direction of the arrow A1) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 extends along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. When the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction), the moving direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. Then, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (arrow B2 direction) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

  In the state where the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the substrate member 510, the connection shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are respectively connected to the connection groove 513 and the support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 as described above. The leading end of the connecting shaft 526 and the leading end of the support shaft 527 are protruded to the back side of the substrate member 510 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

  In this case, the connecting shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connecting hole 541b) of the first link member 541, and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (shaft supporting hole 541a) of the first link member 541. Therefore, the first link member 541 is moved to the support shaft by displacing the connecting shaft 526 along the connecting groove 513 (arrow B1 direction or arrow B2 direction) by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522. It can be rotated about 527.

  Returning to FIG. 33 to FIG. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in a scale plate shape. The first link member 541 is formed with a shaft support hole 541a at the base end portion, a connection hole 541b at the middle portion in the longitudinal direction, and a slide hole 541c at the tip end opposite to the base end portion.

  The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as through-holes having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted therethrough. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having a long hole shape in front view along the long diameter direction in the longitudinal direction of the first link member 541, and is slidable along the long hole shape (long diameter direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted.

  Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated about the support hole 541a in the direction in which the slide hole 541c is raised (arrow B1 direction, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is attached to the substrate member 510. A direction in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved upward along the guide groove 511 and the first link member 541 moves down the slide hole 541c around the support hole 541a (direction of arrow B2, see FIG. 36). , The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are disposed. Since they are connected (connected) to each other through the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510, the driving force transmission path formed by the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (that is, connected to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524). The length dimension of the part (connecting rod 525) that connects the shaft 526 and the part that connects the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the part from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541). ) Becomes longer. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (the shaft support hole 541a) is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510 on the first link member 541. The rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole is increased by utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the driving unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the board member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed. Can do. As a result, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are prevented from being deformed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first link member 541 (the shaft support hole 541a) of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is rotatably supported on the substrate member 510, so that the connecting rod 525 is attached to the substrate member 510. Compared with the case where the shaft is rotatably supported, the transmission path of the driving force from the portion pivotally supported by the substrate member 510 to the slide mechanism 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be shortened. Transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

  The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the biasing spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. It is formed in a shape. Similar to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 is formed with a shaft support hole 542a and a sliding hole 542c at the proximal end portion and the distal end portion, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the board member 510 is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is inserted into the slide hole 542c. Further, a locking claw 542b is formed in the middle portion in the longitudinal direction of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542b is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connection groove 514, and locks the arm portion of the biasing spring 571.

  Therefore, the second link member 542, together with the first link member 541, holds the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically, so that the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. Further, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 via the second link member 542 in the upward direction (the direction in which the distal end side (sliding hole 542c) of the second link member 542 is raised). Therefore, when raising the slide mechanism part 530, the driving force of the drive part 520 can be assisted. Thereby, the enlargement of the drive motor 522 can be suppressed.

  The support shafts 527 and 516 inserted through the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are fitted with a retaining ring E formed as an E ring as a retaining member. The insertion shaft 531c inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a seating surface (diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding holes 541c and 542c) as a stopper. A fastening screw having a head or a washer is fastened (see FIG. 35).

  Here, with respect to the first link member 541, the attachment of the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening of the fastening screw with respect to the connection shaft 526 inserted through the connection hole 541b of the first link member 541 is omitted. That is, by retaining two of the three shafts (the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c), the remaining one (the connecting shaft 526) can be omitted, and accordingly, The number of parts required for retaining can be reduced. In particular, the long first link member 541 is prevented from coming off with respect to the two shafts on the proximal end side and the distal end side, and the shaft at a position intermediate between the proximal end side and the distal end side. With this structure, the first link member 451 can be stably rotated while suppressing the shaft (connection shaft 526) from which the retaining is omitted from being disconnected from the connection hole 541b.

  As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides up and down (up and down) along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engagement member 539 to a predetermined position. Thus, it is coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism section 530 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37A is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530, and FIG. 37B is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 when the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 when the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the back. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, A first pinion gear 537, a second pinion gear 538, and a first coupling member 539 are provided, and the first coupling member 539 is slid up and down by a driving force transmitted from the driving unit 520 via the first link member 541 ( Elevate).

  According to the slide mechanism portion 530 of the present embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the A layer base is formed from the first link member 541. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby increasing the slide displacement (elevation) of the first coupling member 539. It is configured to be able to.

  The A-layer base plate 531 includes a main body portion 531a that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 531b that is a groove-like opening that extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. A plurality of insertion shafts 531c (a total of six in this embodiment) are provided so as to protrude from the rear surface of the main body portion 531a and are arranged side by side with the guide groove 531b interposed therebetween, and protrude to the front side of the main body portion 531a. And a support shaft 531d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537.

  The A layer base plate 531 allows a plurality of insertion shafts 531c to be inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and the collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 511 at the ends of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. Is fastened and fixed as a retaining member so that the substrate member 510 can be slidably moved up and down (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 that is pivotally supported by the support shaft 531 d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

  In the present embodiment, the two insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. At the top, a fastening screw is fastened to the tip to prevent it from coming off.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively positioned on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 39) than the center in the longitudinal direction (upper and lower direction in FIG. 39) of the A layer base plate 531. Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism portion 530 assumes a forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the board member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the first link member 541. The two link members 542 can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid (displaced) in a stable state.

  The B layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape, a plurality of insertion holes 532b formed through the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of protrusions projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 532a. And a rack portion 532d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 532a on the side surface of the main body portion 532a.

  The B layer base plate 532 is inserted by inserting a plurality of insertion shafts 532c into the guide grooves 531b of the A layer base plate 531 and fastening them with fastening screws at the tips of the inserted insertion shafts 532c. The A-layer base plate 531 is held so as to be slidable (up and down).

  In this case, the rack portion 532d disposed on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (main body portion 532a) is engaged with the first pinion gear 537 that is pivotally supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is engaged with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, thereby forming a first set of double rack and pinion structures. Therefore, when the A layer base plate 531 is slid (displaced) relative to the substrate member 510, the B layer base plate 532 is moved relative to the A layer base plate 531 via the first set of double rack and pinion structures. Slide displacement (up and down). In other words, the B layer base plate 532 is slid and displaced (lifted) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the A layer base plate 531.

  The B layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that can be visually recognized by the player from the front side. The B layer decorative body 533 is fixed to the B layer base plate 532, and is integrally displaced with the B layer base plate 532 to slide (elevate). Is done. Specifically, the B layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a protruding from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 532b of the B layer base plate 532 are fastened to the insertion shafts 533a. As a result, it is fixed to the front side of the B layer base plate 532.

  The plurality of insertion shafts 533 a of the B layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 539 b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide grooves 534 b of the C layer base plate 534 and then fixed to the B layer base plate 532. . In this case, one insertion shaft 532a among the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B-layer decorative body 533 rotatably supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are slid and displaced (lifted and lowered) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slid and displaced (lifted and lowered) with respect to the A layer base plate 531. )

  The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 534b that is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. And a plurality of insertion holes 534c formed through the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 534d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the guide groove 534b on the front surface side of the main body portion 532a.

  The C-layer decorative body 535 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visually recognized by the player from the front side, and is fixed to the C-layer base plate 534, and is integrally displaced with the C-layer base plate 534 so as to slide (elevate). Is done. Specifically, the C layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a protruding from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 534c of the C layer base plate 534 are fastened to the insertion shaft 535a. As a result, the C-layer base plate 534 is fixed to the front side.

  The first coupling member 539 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visually recognized by the player from the front side, and that forms a coupled state by contacting the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600. Yes (see FIG. 32), a main body portion 539a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 539b that is a groove-like opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a A decoration portion 539c provided continuously below the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as a rack gear along the guide groove 539b on the back side of the main body portion 532a.

  The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that are inclined downward toward the center. That is, the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed in an inverted V shape with the center protruding in the downward direction (downward in FIG. 38) in the front view shape (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorating portion 539c) is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32).

  In addition, a concave portion 539e1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front is formed in the center of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539. In the concave portion 539e1, a convex portion 630a1 protruding from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is accommodated (concave and convex fitting) at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position.

  In the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, the plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, respectively. Thus, the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are held so as to be slidable (up and down), respectively.

  In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 includes the rack portion 534d disposed on the front side of the C layer base plate 534 (main body portion 534a), and the first coupling member. 539 (main body portion 539a) and a rack portion 539d disposed on the back side of the main body portion 539a, thereby forming a second set of double rack and pinion structures. Therefore, when the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533) is slid (displaced) relative to the A layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is connected via the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. 539 is slid relative to the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid and displaced (lifted / lowered) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the B layer base plate 532.

  Returning to FIG. 33 to FIG. As described above, in the first coupling member 500, the slide mechanism portion 530 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality of (this embodiment) projects from the back surface of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531). In the embodiment, six insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and a part (four) of the inserted insertion shafts 531c is provided with a collar C. While mounting as a retaining member, the remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 (see FIG. 35).

  Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shaft 531c) are provided on the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530), and the plurality of insertion shafts are used as substrate members (corresponding to the substrate member 510). ) Is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511), and the moving member is slid along the guide groove by the driving force of the drive means (corresponding to the drive unit 520).

  In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts that are inserted into the guide grooves. On the other hand, when the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to the collar C) for holding the insertion shaft (preventing removal from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. For this reason, there has been a demand for a method for reducing the cost while allowing the slide displacement of the moving member to be stabilized.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) is disposed on the front side where the slide mechanism 530 is disposed. The first link member 541 is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 on the opposite side to the insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since they are connected, one of the plurality of collars C for preventing the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide grooves 511 can be used as the first link member 541. As a result, the number of insertion shafts 531c is ensured, and the slide mechanism 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized in slide displacement, while the components (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c. The cost can be reduced by reducing the number of points.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 is provided with the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510 that is opposite to the front side on which the slide mechanism portion 530 is disposed. Since the second link member 542 is connected to one insertion shaft 531c among the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, the first link member is arranged symmetrically with being sandwiched. It is possible not only to achieve an effect (stabilization of slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530) by symmetric the support reaction force received by the slide mechanism unit 530 from the 541 and the second link member 542, but also among the plurality of collars C. The first collar C can also be used by the second link member 542, so that the number of insertion shafts 531c is secured and the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer) While enabling stabilization of the sliding displacement of over scan plate 531), to reduce the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion axis 531c, can be further achieved that a reduction in cost.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510, thereby stabilizing the slide displacement and reducing the cost. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 is configured with a crank mechanism (crank gear 524, connecting rod 525, and connecting shaft 526), and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510, so that the connecting groove 513 is interposed therebetween. Thus, by connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the driving unit 520 can be disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510. As a result, the components of the first combined operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively used to efficiently arrange the components. As a result, the size of the first combined operation unit 500 can be reduced.

  In particular, since the decoration unit 560 is disposed on the front side of the slide mechanism unit 530 in the first combined operation unit 500, the slide mechanism unit 530 and the decoration unit 560 are arranged in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 (b) vertical direction). The dimensions in the front-rear direction increase accordingly. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, as described above, the drive unit 520 can be disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510. It can be disposed in a dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism 530. That is, the two elements having relatively large dimensions of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the drive portion 520 can be juxtaposed in the left-right direction. Thereby, the dead space of the limited space can be effectively used, and the first combined operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

  Further, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is centered on the support shaft 527 on the back side of the substrate member 510. Since the structure is rotated, the space for moving the first link member 541 can be planar. That is, a space for the movement of the first link member 541 can be secured by a planar space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to ensure a large space in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the size of the first combined operation unit 500 particularly in the front-rear direction.

  The same applies to the second link member 542. By using the connecting groove 514, the biasing spring 571 is disposed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the above-described dead space is effectively utilized. The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be planar, and as a result, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced in size particularly in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). it can.

  Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 40A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 40B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st joint operation unit 500 in the state where it was done. 41A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is disposed at the coupling position, and FIG. 41B is a diagram illustrating the first coupling member 539 disposed at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st joint operation unit 500 in the state where it was done. 40 and 41, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), in the state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the drive unit 520 rotates the crank gear 524 in the arrow A1 direction via the connecting rod 525. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the sliding holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. It is arranged in a posture rotated in the direction (upper direction in FIG. 40B). Therefore, the A layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism 530 is disposed on the upper end side (upper side of FIG. 40B) of the guide member 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised. Thus, a state in which the retreat position is arranged is formed.

  In this case, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied to the second link member 542. The urging force of the urging spring 571 is such that the posture of the second link member 542 is changed to the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, the posture rotated in the direction of raising the sliding hole 542c around the shaft support hole 542a). ) In the direction of holding. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 that should be stopped at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is moved in the vertical direction. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration in the vertical direction of the first coupling member 539 can be quickly converged using the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

  When the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B2 via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A2 in the driving unit 520 from the state shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). 36 (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated about the shaft support holes 541a and 542a in the direction of lowering the sliding holes 541c and 542c (downward in FIG. 40B). . As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move the sliding holes 541c and 542c downward about the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. Further rotated, the A-layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 539c) of the slide mechanism 530 is disposed on the lower end side (lower side of FIG. 41 (b)) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, whereby the first coupling member. The state where 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

  41 (a) and 41 (b), the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 through the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A1 in the drive unit 520. As a result (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move upward in the sliding holes 541c and 542c about the shaft support holes 541a and 542a (upward in FIG. 41B). It is rotated. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are acted (see FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the first coupling member 539 is disposed (returned) at the retracted position.

  According to the present embodiment, the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured to slide and displace the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction via the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms. The speed can be increased. On the other hand, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40 (a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the other slide mechanism portion 530 is used. Since each of the components must be raised against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to change to the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, centering on the shaft support hole 542a). The sliding hole 542c is caused to act in a direction in which the sliding hole 542c is held in a direction of raising. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41A to the retracted position shown in FIG. 40A against the action of gravity, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as a force, the driving force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity can be reduced.

  Here, the substrate member 510 is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 40 and 41). Specifically, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected to the front side of the substrate member 510 (front side, front side in FIG. 40A) (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the rear side of the substrate member 510 ( Arranged in a posture that is retracted to the rear side, FIG. As a result, the slide mechanism 530 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 is tilted forward by its own weight (an attitude tilted so as to fall down in the direction away from the front of the base member 510 (front side)). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load on the color C and to improve the durability.

  However, since the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured by superimposing the respective elements (for example, the A layer base plate 531, the B layer base plate 532, the C layer base plate 534, etc.), the substrate member 510 with respect to the above-described vertical direction. If the inclination is excessively increased, the elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 are easily brought into close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of sliding displacement increases. For this reason, the inclination described above cannot be made sufficiently large, and therefore a relatively large load is applied to the color C.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward tilting posture of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be restricted not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load on the collar C and improve the durability thereof, and to slide the slide mechanism portion 530 in a stable state (up and down).

  Particularly, as described above, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively positioned above the center in the longitudinal direction of the A layer base plate 531 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism unit 530 assumes a forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed by the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 542. As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (lifted and lowered) in a stable state.

  Next, the second combined operation unit 600 disposed below the first combined operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second combined operation unit 600. 43 (a) is a front view of the second combined operation unit 600, and FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the second combined operation unit 600. In addition, illustration of the front case body 612 is abbreviate | omitted in Fig.43 (a). 42 and 43 show a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second combined operation unit 600 is pivotally supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, and the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 so that the base end side is rotatable. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 that is rotatably supported on the respective distal ends of the inner link member 621 and outer link member 622, and an inner link member 621. And a driving motor 640 that generates a driving force for displacing the outer link member 622, and transmission means (a pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear) for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. 652).

  In the present embodiment, a pair of link means, the second coupling member 630, the drive motor 640, and the transmission means is disposed on the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612. . In this case, the pair disposed on the left side and the pair disposed on the right side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 is the width direction of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (FIG. 43 (a) left and right). (Direction) Except for the point formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the imaginary line passing through the center and the difference in the shape of the decorative part, the configuration is substantially the same, and therefore the same reference numerals are used for explanation.

  Each of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 is a member formed from a resin material in a plate shape, and is fastened and fixed to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and a link means (inside space) between the opposing surfaces (internal space) The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are accommodated.

  The back case body 611 is formed with a pair of guide grooves 611a formed to be curved in an arc shape. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centering on a base end shaft 621a described later (that is, formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of an annular shape centering on the base end shaft 621a), and the inner link member 621 is formed. A collar 621d that is rotatably supported on the rear surface is fitted inside. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the proximal end shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, whereby the inner link member 621 ( And the rotation of the outer link member 622) can be stabilized. As a result, the position accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be increased.

  The inner side link member 621 and the outer side link member 622 are rotatably supported on the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 via base end shafts 621a and 622a, while the front end side thereof is a front end shaft 621b, The second coupling member 630 is rotatably supported by the shaft 622b.

  In this case, the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 have the same distance between the proximal shaft 621a and the proximal shaft 622a and the distance between the distal shaft 621b and the distal shaft 622b, and the proximal shaft 621a. In addition, the distance between the distal end shaft 621b and the distance between the proximal end shaft 622a and the distal end shaft 622b are equalized to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated around the base end shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a rotation center and is parallel (that is, illustrated in FIG. 43A). (While maintaining the posture to do).

  The second coupling member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion visually recognized by the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32). An upper surface 630a with which 539e abuts and an opposing surface 630b with which the other second coupling member 630 abuts each other are formed.

  Note that the upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface inclined downward toward the facing surface 630b in the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the facing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction. Is done. Therefore, when the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought into contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape on the upper surface 630a side of the pair of second coupling members 630 has a V shape with a recessed center. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 44B). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorating portion 539c) is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 (see FIG. 32).

  Further, on the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, convex portions 630a1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view project from the opposing surface 630b side. The convex portion 630a1 is accommodated (concave and convex fit) in a concave portion 539e1 that is concavely formed on the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, as described above, the relative displacement (front-rear direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position. Here, the convex portion 630a1 is made smaller as the thickness dimension goes toward the protruding tip. Therefore, when the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 are coupled (contacted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, the convex portions 630a1 can be easily inserted (internally fitted) into the concave portions 539e1. it can.

  A gear portion 621 c is integrally formed on the proximal end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a portion formed in a fan shape that projects outward in the radial direction around the proximal end shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the fan shape. A transmission gear 652 described later is meshed with the gear portion 621c.

  The drive motor 640 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 611, and a pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 protruding to the front side of the back case body 611. A transmission gear 652 is meshed with the pinion gear 651, and the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 is meshed with the transmission gear 652, as described above.

  Next, the operation of the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. In this description, FIG. 43 (a) is referred to as appropriate.

  44 (a) and 44 (b) are front views of the second combined operation unit 600, and illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. 44A, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position. In FIG. 44B, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. Each of these states is illustrated.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 43 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are each tilted in the direction away from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other in the left and right directions. When the left and right drive motors 640 are rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted via the transmission gear 652 to the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is rotated around the proximal end shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are rotated about the base end shaft 621a, and the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are close to each other as shown in FIG. Standing in the direction.

  When the left and right drive motors 640 are further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44A, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are close to each other as shown in FIG. 44B. The pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the opposing surfaces 630b are in contact with each other. On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 44B, when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to that described above, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are separated from each other. As shown in FIG. 43A, the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

  Returning to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the combining operation of the first combining operation unit 500 and the second combining operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 is referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are disposed at the coupling position.

  As described above, the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are coupled from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. The coupling members 630 are arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right sides close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism, and the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right sides. As shown in FIG. 32, the lower surface 539 e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630 a of the pair of second coupling members 630.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 45, the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 are configured such that the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is an angle θ. It is said. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (slidingly displaced) along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 45), the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. The vertical force F is a force component Fv (= F × cos θ) in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a, and a force component Fp (= F × sin θ) in a direction parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. Can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load acting on the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the angle θ with respect to the horizontal plane of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a is set to be smaller than the angle α with respect to the vertical direction of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the acting direction of the force component Fv is extended starting from the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a, the extension line is on the inner side (inner link member 621) of the proximal end shaft 622a of the outer link member 622. Of the base end shaft 621a side).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the direction (vertical) is substantially orthogonal to the adjacent direction of the pair of second coupling members 630. Direction, the vertical direction of FIG. 45), the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630, and the lower surface 539 e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630 a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Then, a force can be formed in a direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other in the adjacent direction. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled to each other. It is possible to ensure a presentation effect by coupling the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630).

  That is, even in a conventional gaming machine, a pair of members are provided so as to be movable, and the pair of members are retracted to different retracted positions, and moved from the different retracted positions to be disposed at the combined position. There is one that joins these members together (for example, see JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, when the coupling is not properly performed, such as a gap is formed between the pair of members at the coupling position, the effect of rendering the pair of members together is impaired. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the pair of members are symmetrical, it is relatively easy to connect the pair of members face to face, but three or more members are properly connected ( That is, it was difficult to combine them while suppressing the generation of gaps.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, Since a force in a direction in which the second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other can be formed in the adjacent direction, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Not only can this be suppressed, but these members can be coupled to each other while suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630. That is, three or more members can be appropriately coupled to each other, and a production effect by the coupling can be ensured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front-view shape (on FIGS. 32 and 45) on the upper surface 630 a side (the upper side of FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape shown in the drawing is a concave shape with the center recessed downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45), while the first coupling member 539 is viewed from the lower surface 539e side (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape (the shape illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponds to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630, and the center protrudes downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45).

  Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surfaces 539e of the first coupling members 539 are aligned with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. When contacted with each other, due to the concave shape and the protruding shape, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630, and the first coupling member 539 is paired with the pair of second coupling members 630. The player is reminded of a mode in which the players are spread apart in a direction away from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b).

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, so that the pair of second coupling members. By forming a force in a direction in which the 630s are brought close to each other, the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled while suppressing generation of a gap between the opposing surfaces 630b. As a result, the player can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57, the annular motion unit 700 will be described.

  FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 in a state where the ring forming member 790 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is a view of the annular ring in a state where the ring forming member 790 is disposed at the coupling position. 7 is a front perspective view of an operation unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the annular motion unit 700 includes a pair of annular forming members 790 that are moved up and down via a link member 770, and, as described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display). Below the device 81 (refer to FIG. 2)) and disposed on the back case 210 at a position on the back side of the rotary operation unit 300 (refer to FIGS. 6 to 9). The annular operation unit 700 is moved up and down while rotating the pair of annular forming members 790 and arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupled position shown in FIG.

  In the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring forming members 790 are lowered downward while being separated from each other left and right, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring forming members 790 is raised upward while being rotated in the direction close to each other, and the pair of ring forming members 790 is coupled to form the third symbol display device. An annular shape is formed on the front side of 81 (see FIG. 10).

  In this case, according to the ring operating unit 700, when the pair of ring forming members 790 are raised upward and arranged at the coupling position, the ring forming members 790 are mechanically moved to the coupling position (raised position). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for holding the pair of ring forming members 790 at the coupling position can be suppressed.

  48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular motion unit 700 when the exploded annular motion unit 700 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annular motion unit 700 when the exploded annular motion unit 700 is viewed from the back. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular motion unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a back case body 720 disposed on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and a side opposite to the back case 720. The front case body 730 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, the drive motor 740 disposed in the intermediate case 710 and generating a rotational driving force, and the rotational driving force of the driving motor 740 are transmitted. A gear group (first gear 751 to sixth gear 756), a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) for converting the rotational motion transmitted through the gear group into a linear motion, and A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 An elevating base member 780 whose tip is axially supported, proximal to the elevating base member 780 is formed mainly includes a pair of annular member 790 which is rotatably supported.

  The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism so as to be rotatable and slidable with respect to the rear case body 720 disposed on the rear side, and is disposed on the front side. 730 is a member that holds the base end of the link member 770 so as to be slidably displaceable with the main body 730. The main body 711 is formed in a flat plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the insertion groove 712 formed in the opening of the main body 711. And an overhanging portion 713 projecting upward from the upper edge of the main body portion 711.

  The insertion grooves 712 are inserted through the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711), and the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 that are inserted therethrough are inserted. It is a groove-like opening that is inserted through the insertion holes 762 c of the pair of racks 762 on the back side of the main body 711, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 711. The insertion groove 712 has a groove width that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The overhanging portion 713 is a part that abuts against the back surface of the link member 770 and suppresses the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 56). And is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view that widens toward the upper edge of the main body portion 711 from the leading end of the overhang, and the front surface 713a thereof is the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711. It is formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected without any step and parallel to each other).

  Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the standing state, the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 contacts the back surface of the link member 770 (FIGS. 47 and 56). In addition, when the link member 770 is in an upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 and the column portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). . Thereby, since the posture of the link member 770 can be brought into contact with the link member 770 in an upright state where the posture of the link member 770 is particularly unstable and in the vicinity thereof, the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

  In addition, the edge part of the overhang | projection part 713 is curved and formed in circular arc shape in front view. Therefore, as the link member 770 stands up (that is, as its posture tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can contact the back surface of the link member 770 can be increased. While the swaying of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, the area in which the overhanging portion 713 is visually recognized from the front can be further reduced to prevent the appearance from being damaged.

  The overhanging portion 713 has a head 713b formed at the front end in the overhanging direction (the upper side in FIGS. 48 and 49) protruding frontward (front), and this head 713b is a front case body 730 described later. Connected to the top of the column 732. Therefore, as described later, when the pair of link members 770 stands upright, the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713 is interposed between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

  The back case body 720 is a member that holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism so as to be rotatable and slidable with respect to the intermediate case body 710, and has a main body 721 formed in a flat plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. An insertion groove 722 having an opening formed in the main body 721, a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged in parallel to the insertion groove 722, and a gear group (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756) And a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support the pinion gear 761.

  The insertion groove 722 has an insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 protruding from the back surface of the rack 762 (that is, an insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position overlapping the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in a front view in the assembled state. The insertion groove 722 is set to have a groove width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

  The front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for allowing the front end guide piece 762 a and the rear end guide shaft 762 b of the rack 762 to be inserted and restricting the moving direction thereof. They are arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined interval therebetween. The front end guide groove 723 is set to have a groove width smaller than that of the rear end guide groove 724, and the rear end guide shaft 762 b of the rack 762 cannot be inserted into the front end guide groove 723. . Thereby, the assembly defect at the time of assembling the rack 762 to the back case body 720 can be suppressed, and as a result, the workability of the assembly work can be improved.

  The front case body 730 is a member that holds the pair of link members 770 so as to be slidable with respect to the intermediate case body 710, and has a main body portion 731 that is formed in a flat plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the main body portion 731. And a columnar column portion 732 that is disposed in front of the column and extends along the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 731 has a back surface 731a formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and the link member 770 is in a tilted state as will be described later. When rotating (displaced) between the standing state and the front surface and the back surface of the link member 770, the back surface 731a of the main body portion 731, the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 are arranged. Make contact. Accordingly, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction in FIG. 54). it can.

  The column portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and sandwiching the link member 770 with the overhang portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (the front left side in FIG. 48) is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the ascending / descending of the elevating base body 780, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section from a metal material. Retained. In this way, the guide rod 733 is formed using a dead space by forming the pillar portion 732 into a box shape with the front face open and storing the guide rod 733 inside the pillar portion 732. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the entire annular operation unit 700.

  As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the lifting base body 780 so that the moving direction of the lifting base body 780 is changed to the vertical direction (the guide rod 733 of the guide rod 733 via the guided portion 784). Guide in the axial direction). In this case, the guide bar 733 is disposed forward (front side) with respect to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and rearward (back side) with respect to the lifting base body 780 (main body portion 781). In addition, it is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the lifting base body 780 offset to the front side with respect to the rack 762 and ensuring the smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780.

  The drive motor 740 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and projects the drive shaft to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the second gear 752 to the sixth gear 756 that are respectively supported by the plurality of shafts 725 of the back case body 720 are fixed to the first gear 751. Are engaged with each other in order, and the sixth gear 756 is engaged with a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported on the shaft 725 of the back case body 720.

  As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism includes the pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported on the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pair of pinion gears 761 is sandwiched therebetween. The racks 762 are opposed to each other in a posture in which their tooth surfaces face each other.

  The rack 762 has a front end guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b projecting from one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively, and an insertion hole 762c is formed through the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. . The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped protrusion, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft body having a circular cross section. As described above, the front end guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, thereby allowing the rack 762 to slide (linear motion). The direction is restricted by the extending direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724.

  The pair of link members 770 is a member for constituting a link mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762 and the other side in the longitudinal direction (tip end) is connected to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790. Here, a detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

  50 (a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50 (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (c) is a portion Lc of FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50D is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member 770 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG.

  The link member 770 includes a long plate-shaped main body 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back surface of the main body 771 on one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body 771, and the insertion shaft 772. A protruding wall portion 773 protruding from the front surface of the main body portion 771 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (front end) of the main body portion 771 on the opposite side, and a gear portion disposed at the protruding front end of the protruding wall portion 773. 774.

  As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The protruding wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 toward the front (front) side of the main body portion 771, and protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at a protruding height h. The gear portion 774 includes a shaft support hole 774a formed penetrating in the center and a plurality of teeth 774b engraved on the outer periphery around the shaft support hole 774, and the shaft support hole 774a has a shaft of the elevating base body 780. 782 is inserted (supported), and meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790 via the teeth 774b.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth direction is parallel to the axial direction, and the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 extend over the entire wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774. It is engraved. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is relatively displaced with respect to the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 to be engaged by the deflection or twist of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIGS. 48 and FIG. 49), teeth 774b that are engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 can be engaged with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790. It is possible to suppress the disengagement between the portion 774 and the gear portion 792. Further, even when the relative displacement due to the deflection or twist described above occurs and the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth engraved by extending on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 774b can secure a meshing area between the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b), thereby suppressing uneven wear of these teeth 774b and 772b and improving its durability. Can be achieved.

  Here, for example, if the body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (radially outward) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to ensure the area of the seating surface on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in this embodiment, since the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the protruding wall portion 773 can be secured on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. The area of the seating surface is reduced.

  In this case, the protruding wall portion 773 has a wall surface opposite to the wall surface engraved by extending the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 (the wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft support hole 774a) of the shaft support hole 774. Since it is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape centering on the shaft center, even if the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the shaft of the gear portion 774 The area of the seating surface can be secured on the end surface in the direction, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) disposed on the end surface in the axial direction of the gear portion 774 can be increased accordingly. Further, when the link member 770 (the main body 771, the projecting wall 773, and the gear 774) is integrally formed from a resin material, the projecting wall 773 is opposite to the wall on which the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, not only the projecting wall portion 773 but also the overall thickness including the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 can be made uniform, and the moldability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the protruding wall portion 773 is engraved with the teeth 774b over the entire surface (that is, up to the connecting portion with the front surface of the main body portion 771), so that a region where the teeth 774b are formed is sufficiently large. And the engagement with the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the ring forming member 790 can be more reliably suppressed. Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (the main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773 and the gear portion 774) is integrally formed from a resin material, the teeth 774b extend only partway along the protruding wall portion 773. In each case, the thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over the entirety, and the moldability can be further improved.

  As described above, in the link member 770, the protruding wall portion 773 protrudes from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at the protruding height h, and the gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding end of the protruding wall portion 773. Therefore, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the protruding height h of the protruding wall portion 773. That is, in the assembled state, the arrangement position of the elevating base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (front) by the protruding height h of the protruding wall portion 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The effect of this offset will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 48 and FIG. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the driving motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770. The main body 780 and the back surface of the main body 780 And a pair of shafts 782 that support the gear portion 774 (shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and a gear portion 792 (shaft support) of the ring forming member 790 that is juxtaposed below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the holes 792a), and disposed below the pair of shafts 783 on the back surface of the main body portion 781, and are guided in the vertical direction by the column portion 732 (guide rod 733) of the front case body 730. A guided portion 784 and a cover body 785 disposed on the back surface of the main body portion 781.

  A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rod 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rod 733 is inserted into the insertion hole, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rod 733. It is restricted only in the direction along.

  The cover body 785 is a member arranged to face the axial end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a substantially trapezoidal head in front view. A portion 785a and an extending portion 785b extending downward from the lower edge of the head portion and having a width narrower than the head portion 785a, and these are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. . As will be described later, when relative displacement occurs in the gear portions 774 and 792, the cover body 785 (the head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 792. Therefore, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state between the gear portions 774 and the meshing state between the gears 774 can be properly maintained.

  The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 have shafts 782 and 783 inserted through the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the gear portions 774 and 792, respectively. A fastening screw is fastened and fixed while a collar C having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support holes 774a and 792a is interposed at the tips of the shafts 782 and 783, so that the shafts 782 and 783 are rotatably supported. The

  The pair of ring forming members 790 are members that are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 that is transmitted via the link member 770 and that form an annular shape at the coupling position. A main body 791 formed in a shape divided into two and a gear portion 792 disposed on one side (base end) in the circumferential direction of the main body 791 are mainly provided. The gear portion 792 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 and meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and a shaft support hole 792a that is formed through the center, and the shaft support hole 792a is the center. And a plurality of teeth 792b carved on the outer periphery.

  A magnet (not shown) is embedded in the other circumferential side (tip) of the main body 791 opposite to the side where the gear portion 792 is disposed, and an annular shape is formed at the coupling position. When doing so (see FIG. 47), the tips of the ring forming member 790 can be brought into close contact with each other using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, an annular shape can be reliably formed by the pair of annular forming members 790.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state between the link member 770, the elevating base body 780, and the ring forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annular motion unit 700. FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the elevating base body 780 is disposed between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the elevating base body 780, the ends (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are respectively supported by a pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), and a pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 51). 49), the base ends (gear portion 792) of the pair of ring forming members 790 are respectively pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are engaged with each other.

  Therefore, as will be described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 causes the gear portion 774 (see the shaft 782, see FIG. 49). The center is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the rotation is transmitted to the ring forming member 790 through the meshing of the gear portions 774 and 792, so that the ring forming member 790 is rotated by the gear portion 792 (shaft). 783, see FIG. 49), and is rotated with respect to the gear unit elevating base body 780. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 is raised or lowered with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 by raising or lowering the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). To FIG. 57).

  Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the distal end of a link member 770 formed in a long plate shape, and is moved up and down with respect to each case body 710, 720, 730 via the link member 770. Sometimes, the link member 770 (main body portion 771) is likely to be vibrated or swayed in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51) of the lifting base body 780 due to deflection or twisting. Also, the ring forming member 790 is also formed in a long plate shape, and the distal end opposite to the base end connected to the lifting base body 780 is a free end. It is easy to generate vibration and shaking with respect to the lifting base body 780. In particular, in this embodiment, since the magnet is embedded at the tip of the ring forming member 790, the weight of the tip is increased, and the ring forming member 790 is more likely to generate vibration and shaking.

  Such vibration and shaking of the elevating base body 780 in the front-rear direction causes a relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevating base body 780. That is, a relative displacement is caused between the gear portion 774 formed integrally with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. Similarly, vibration or shaking of the ring forming member 790 with respect to the lifting base body 780 causes relative displacement between the gear portion 792 formed integrally with the ring forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. . Therefore, the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and 792 becomes unstable, and not only the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the lifting operation of the lifting base body 780 are not properly performed due to the poor transmission of the driving force, but the gear portion 774 is not properly performed. 792 is accelerated, and the durability is lowered.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a cover body 785 is disposed on the back surface of the elevating base body 780, and the cover body 785 is axially end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. Arranged to face each other. As a result, even if the link member 770 (main body portion 771) is bent or twisted, the lifting base body 780 and the ring forming member 790 are vibrated or shaken, and relative displacement is about to occur between the gear portions 774 and 790. The cover body 785 (the head 785a and the extending portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 790, so that the relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 792 is suppressed. The state can be kept appropriate. As a result, it is possible to suppress poor transmission of the driving force, properly perform the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790 and the lifting operation of the lifting base body 780, and suppress wear of the gear portions 774, 792. Durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head 785a of the cover body 785 is disposed above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785 is disposed on the link member 770. They are arranged between the gear portions 774 and between the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790. Therefore, of the end surfaces in the axial direction of the gear portions 774 and 792, the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 and the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 opposite to the main body portion 791 across the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49). The head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the end surface in the axial direction, and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively restricted.

  For example, when the link member 770 is in an upright state or in a state close to the upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched between the main body 771 of the link member 770. Since the head 785a of the cover member 785 is disposed on the opposite side, the displacement of the gear portion 774 caused by the deflection or twist of the main body 771 of the link member 770 is more effectively caused by the head 785a of the cover body 785. Can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in a tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or in a state close to the tilted state, a shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) with respect to the main body 771 of the link member 770. ) Is disposed on the opposite side of the cover member 785 so that the displacement of the gear portion 774 caused by the deflection or twist of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 is reduced. It can be effectively regulated by 785b.

  On the other hand, regarding the ring forming member 790, the left and right sides of the gear portion 792 (left and right in FIG. 51) regardless of the rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is standing or tilting). Since the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) with respect to the main body portion 792 of the ring forming member 790, the extending portion of the cover member 785 is provided. 785b is disposed, and the displacement of the gear portion 792 due to the deflection or twist of the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 can be effectively restricted by the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785.

  In the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are not only meshed with the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790 positioned below the pair of link members 770 but also between the gear portions 774 adjacent to the left and right. Are also engaged. Similarly, the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 are not only meshed with the gear portions 774 of the link member 770 positioned above them, but the gear portions 792 adjacent to the left and right are also meshed. Is done.

  Thereby, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational operation of the pair of ring forming members 790. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of ring forming members 790 (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent from each other with respect to the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the phase shift amount (for example, backlash amount or dimensional tolerance) of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 is a pair of racks 762. Further, the phase shift amount of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of shakiness of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and further, the ring forming member with respect to the link member 770 790 phase shift amount (for example, the amount of shakiness of the shafts 782, 783 with respect to the shaft support holes 774a, 792a or the amount of shakiness of the teeth 792b with respect to the teeth 774b) differs between the pair of ring forming members 790. As a result, the phase shift occurs in the rotational operation of the pair of ring forming members 790. Synchronization accuracy is reduced.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other and the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 are meshed with each other. Even if this occurs in the transmission path, the phase shift does not appear in the rotational operation of the ring forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed in the most downstream of the drive force transmission path), As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57, the operation of the annular motion unit 700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 are referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 53 is an LIII- FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular operation unit 700 along the line LIII. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 schematically showing the annular motion unit 700 in which the pair of annular forming members 790 is arranged at a position between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit 700 taken along line LV-LV in FIG. 56 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 700 in which a pair of annular formation members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of the LVII- FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular operation unit 700 in the LVII line.

  52 to 57, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 510, the back case body 520, and the front case body 530, the drive motor 740, and the gear group (first gear) The drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756) or the cover body 785 is not shown. However, in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56, the position of the upper edge in the main body 711 and the overhanging portion 713 (front surfaces 711a and 713a) of the intermediate case body 710 and the main body portion 731 (rear surface 731a) of the front case body 730 are shown. ) Schematically illustrates the position of the upper edge in each case using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in a state in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in a direction away from each other, and the distal end side thereof (the distal end guide piece 762a). Side tooth surface is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end side (insertion shaft 772) is pivotally supported by the rear end sides (insertion holes 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are in an inclined state. The elevating base body 780 on which the front end side (gear portion 774) is pivotally supported is disposed at the lowermost position. In addition, the pair of ring forming members 790 are expanded in a direction away from each other (distributed left and right).

  When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (a state where the pair of ring forming members 790 are disposed at the retracted position) and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49). 52), the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and the pair of racks 762 shortens the unfolded length as the pinion gear 761 rotates (the rear end side insertion holes 762c are close to each other). In the direction of movement). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually raised by their base end sides (insertion shafts 772) being displaced toward the center (that is, in directions close to each other).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780 is formed, and the rotation is performed via the gear portions 774 and 792, and a pair of ring forming members. By being transmitted to 790, the pair of ring forming members 790 are rotated relative to the lifting base body 780, and the ends of the pair of ring members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, by the standing operation of the pair of link members 770, a relative displacement of the lifting base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and rack 762) is formed, and the lifting base 790 is raised.

  As described above, in the annular motion unit 700, the elevating base body 780 is pivotally supported at the distal ends of the pair of link members 770 whose base ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 are raised or tilted. The elevating base body 780 can be moved up and down by further engaging the gear portion 792 of the annular forming member 790 whose base end is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, The ring forming member 790 can be rotated by the relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780.

  That is, means for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 740 to the lifting base body 790 (means for lifting) and means for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 740 to the ring forming member 790 (means for rotating) are individually provided. Therefore, the link member 770 can also be used as the link member 770, and accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Further, the rotational movement of the ring forming member 790 and the linear movement in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, the circular ring is not formed at a fixed position, but the position is changed in the vertical direction. Since the ring is formed in order, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are engaged with each other, and the link member 770 is engaged via the engagement of these gears 774 and 792. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, when the pair of link members 770 are raised, the position of the center of gravity is increased. The bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body 771) causes vibration and shaking in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 54, the left-right direction in FIG. 55) of the elevating base body 780 (and the pair of ring forming members 790). (The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction increases).

  The link member 770 (main body portion 771) or the ring forming member 790 (main body portion 791) is integrally formed with the link member 770 and the ring forming member 790, such as deflection, torsion, and vibration or shaking in the front-rear direction. By affecting the gear portions 774 and 792 and relatively displacing the gear portions 774 and 792, the gear portions 774792 may be disengaged. Even if the gear portions 774 and 792 can be prevented from being disengaged, the meshing state (meshing area) becomes unstable and the surface pressure concentrates on a part of the tooth surface, so that the tooth 774b 792b, and the durability may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the link member 770 is engraved with teeth 774b extending from the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 that connects the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ) Even when the above-described relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 occurs, it is easy to maintain the meshing between the gear portions 774 and 792 by the extension of 774b. As a result, not only can the tooth disengagement be suppressed, but also the tooth engagement can be stabilized, uneven wear of the teeth 774b and 792b can be suppressed, and the durability can be improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at positions intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position (specifically, the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 When the rack is disposed at an intermediate position of the relative movable range) and the rising angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth of the gear portion 774 are teeth 774b that are engraved on the protruding wall portion 773. The teeth 774b connected to 774b (see FIG. 50) start meshing with the teeth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790.

  Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 described later (that is, the rising angle of the link member 770 increases, In a range in which shaking is likely to occur and the gears 774 and 792 are most easily disengaged, the teeth 774b extended and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 can be used effectively. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve the durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

  54 and 55, the drive motor 740 drives the pinion gear 761 further in the clockwise direction (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and the pair of racks 762 further shortens their unfolded length (rear end). When the side insertion hole 762c is linearly moved in the direction in which the insertion holes 762c are close to each other, the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the lifting base body 780 and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and the tips of the pair of ring forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other, so that the ring shape is changed. It is formed.

  In this case, in a state where the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 are erected upright (posture along the vertical direction)), the pair of link members Between the opposing surfaces of 770, the connecting portion of the column portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the overhang portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 (refer to the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713, FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 in this embodiment). Since the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713) are in contact with the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56), a pair forming an annular shape The posture of the base member 780 supporting the ring-forming member 790 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

  That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 are erected upright and the center of gravity is increased, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (left and right in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. In addition, the rack 762 is also easily moved in the direction of the linear motion (the left-right direction in FIG. 56) in response to the left-right rotation of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it is difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 disposed at the distal ends of the link member 770 become unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting portion (the overhang portion) between the front case body 730 (the column portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (the overhang portion 713) between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. 713 head 713b) is interposed, the connecting portion (head 713b) causes the pair of link members 770 to rotate in the left-right direction around the insertion shaft 772 and to move in the direction of linear movement of the rack 762. Can be restricted. Accordingly, the posture of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position while maintaining the pair of link members 770 in an upright state.

  Further, the pair of link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left and right (left and right directions in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56), so that the link member 770 is inclined relatively downward (for example, FIG. 52 to FIG. 55 to 55), a pair of link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other when the pair of link members 770 tries to rotate left and right (left and right directions in FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. 770 can cancel each other out, and the posture can be maintained.

  On the other hand, the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, and it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to displacement in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (the insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) is opposed to the front surface and the back surface on the proximal end side of the link member 770. The back surface 731a can be brought into contact with the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). Accordingly, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 54). Can do. As a result, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be moved up and down while being stabilized.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a protruding portion 713 is formed to protrude upward at the center portion in the width direction of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49). 56, as the center portion in the width direction is approached (that is, as the link member 770 is erected), the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is increased (that is, abuts against the back surface of the link member 770). The possible area is increased).

  In this way, the position of the upper edge was raised by partially raising only the central part, rather than raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body part 711) as a whole. While suppressing the appearance from being damaged by the wall surface of the intermediate case body 710 (or reducing the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81), the closer the link member 770 is to the upright state, the more the protrusion 713 It is possible to increase the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing shaking in the front-rear direction) by increasing the contactable area between the front surface 713a and the back surface of the link member 770. As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the standing state while suppressing the appearance from being damaged. That is, the postures of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stably held in a stopped state at the coupling position, and the postures of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are near the coupling position. Can be raised and lowered while stabilizing.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the protruding portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowest position). The shape is set so as to be able to contact the back surface of 770 (see FIG. 46). Thus, the posture of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 is stably held in a stopped state at the coupling position, and the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are near the coupling position. For the purpose of moving up and down while stabilizing the posture, the lift base 780 disposed at the retracted position (lowermost) using the portion (the overhanging portion 713) whose height of the upper edge is increased, and The effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring forming members 790 in the stopped state can be obtained at the same time.

  56 and 57, when the drive motor 740 is driven to rotate in the direction opposite to that described above, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56 (counterclockwise), and the pinion gear 761 With the rotation, the pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, linearly moved in a direction in which the rear end insertion holes 762c are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually tilted, and the pair of ring forming members 790 are retracted to the retracted position, as shown in FIGS.

  Here, in the annular motion member 700, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. Is done. That is, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are applied in the direction in which the pair of racks 762 are deployed via the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 may be lowered from the coupling position. In this case, the descent of the elevating base body 780 is regulated by causing the driving force of the drive motor 740 to oppose the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 (that is, the elevating base body 780 is coupled). In the structure of holding in position, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the protruding wall portion 773 is interposed between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the protruding height of the protruding wall portion 773 is set. The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body 711 to the front (front) side by the length h (see FIG. 50D). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 is a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, the paper surface of FIGS. 54 and 56). The thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body part 771 and the gear part 774 and the projecting height h of the projecting wall part 773) is shown on the front side, the left side of FIGS. Is offset (separated) from the rack 762 by that amount.

  Thereby, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770 even in the above-described offset direction. That is, as a force component applied to the rack 762 from the link member 770, a force component in the direction in which the elevating base body 780 is offset can be generated, and the force component that moves the rack 762 in the moving direction accordingly. Can be reduced. As a result, energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, in the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the lifting base body 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 are applied to the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 serves as a force component that acts on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction in which the link member is expanded (that is, the direction in which the link member 770 in the standing state is tilted). Thereby, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position, and as a result, energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 Can be suppressed.

  In detail, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the lifting base body 780 is the insertion shaft of the pair of link members 770. 772 is made smaller than the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between T2 (T1 <T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture that is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, a posture in which the pair of link members 770 has a C shape). In this way, by setting the pair of link members 770 in a C-shaped posture, in order to start the operation from the state shown in FIG. 56 (the coupling position) to the retracted position, the drive motor 740 is configured as described above. When rotationally driving in the opposite direction, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 by the rotational driving (that is, the tilt of the pair of link members 770) can be started easily and reliably.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a magnet is embedded at the tip of the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790, and the tips of the main body 791 are magnetized, so even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released. The elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetizing force of the magnet. In this case, keeping the pair of link members 770 in a C-shaped posture (that is, setting T1 <T2) maintains the coupled state at the coupled position and starts the operation from the coupled position to the retracted position. This is particularly effective in terms of both ensuring both the release of the combined state at the time.

  Here, the magnet embedded at the tip of the main body 791 of the ring forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 and the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 are approximately. Preferably, they are the same (T1 = T2) or the former is larger than the latter (T2 <T1). Accordingly, even when the driving force of the driving motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position.

  In this embodiment, the guide bar 733 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the back side (right side in FIG. 57) than the lifting base body 780 (main body portion 781). Is done. The guided portion 784 of the lifting base body 780 through which the guide rod 733 is inserted is disposed at the lowermost position of the lifting base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of the forward offset of the elevating base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762 c of the rack 762, the elevating base body 780, and the pair of ring forming members A guide rod 733 is disposed at a position between the center of gravity of the structure 790 and the elevation base body 780 is guided up and down via the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With this arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effects of placing the lifting base body 780 offset from the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring the smooth lifting operation of the lifting base body 780.

  Next, the swing operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As described above, the swing operation unit 800 includes the two arm members 820 (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and includes two units for operating (displacement) both the arm members 820. In other words, the swing operation unit 800 is composed of two units that are disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 211a above the rear case 210 in the front view of the rear case 210. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, in the following, one unit of these two units (on the left side of the opening 211a) will be described. The arranged unit (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be described as a swing operation unit 800.

  58 is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 in a state in which the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swing operation unit in a state in which the arm member 820 is protruded to the projecting position. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swing operation unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 that applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of being vertically lowered and is retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 so that it cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 6). At the extended position, the arm member 820 has a posture in which its tip is lifted upward and inclined obliquely downward, and the tip of the arm member 820 projects to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

  In this case, in this embodiment, when the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to oppose the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (its own weight), and the arm member 820 is moved to the extended position accordingly. Energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required for holding can be suppressed. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 when the exploded swing operation unit 800 is viewed from the front. 61A is a rear view of the swing operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a swing at the portion LXIb in FIG. 61A. 5 is a partially enlarged rear view of an operation unit 800. FIG. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show the swing operation unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the swing operation unit 800 includes a mounting base 810 disposed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), and a base end rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 provided with the drive motor 830 and disposed in front of the mounting base 810. Is mainly configured.

  The attachment base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between the front case body 840 and is formed in a rectangular shape that is vertically long when viewed from the front. The mounting base 810 includes a shaft 811 that protrudes from the front surface thereof and rotatably supports the arm member 820.

  The arm member 820 includes a main body portion 821 formed in an elongated shape, a groove portion 822 formed as a groove-like opening on the proximal end side of the main body portion 821, and a main body portion 821 opposite to the groove portion 822. A decorative portion 823 that is covered on the front side of the front end side and is formed as a decorative body, and a shaft support hole 824 that is formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821. Configured primarily for preparation.

  The groove portion 822 includes a first groove 822a that extends linearly, and a second groove 822b that is connected to one end of the first groove 822a and extends while being curved in an arc shape. It is formed as an L-shaped groove from the front side 822b. In other words, in the groove portion 822, a concave portion provided in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other is the second groove 822b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that the projecting pin 833 is disposed at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63B). In FIG. 4, the arc shape is centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. In addition, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to the same dimension. The arm member 820 is inserted into the shaft support hole 824 through the shaft 811 of the mounting base 810, so that the base end of the arm member 820 is inserted. Is rotatably supported with respect to the mounting base 810. In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 in a region in front of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61B). reference). Accordingly, the arm member 820 is held in a state where the base end thereof is rotatable between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 facing each other.

  The drive motor 830 has a base end fixed to the drive shaft 831 and a plate-like drive arm 832 extending radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion protruding from the distal end of the drive arm 832. It is mainly provided with an installation pin 833, and is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 by a fastening screw in a state where the projection pin 833 is inserted into the groove 822 of the arm member 820.

  As described above, the protruding pin 833 is a portion that is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and is an outer portion that is equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a cylindrical body having a diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the projecting pin 833 is moved in the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove portion 822. As a result, the arm member 820 is moved. Is rotated about the axis 811.

  Next, the swinging operation of the swinging operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this description, FIG. 61 is referred to as appropriate.

  62 to 64 are diagrams for explaining the process of moving the arm member 820 of the swing operation unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 62 (a), 63 (a), and FIG. 64 (a) is a rear view of the swing operation unit 800, and FIGS. 62 (b), 63 (b) and 64 (b) are respectively a portion LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a) and FIG. 63 (a). FIG. 65 is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit 800 in a portion LXIIIb of FIG. 64 and a portion LXIVb of FIG.

  62 shows a state in which the drive motor 830 is driven to rotate and the arm member 820 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position, and FIG. 63 shows the arm member 820 in the extended position. FIG. 64 shows the state immediately after reaching the arm member 820 reaching the overhanging position and the drive motor being further driven to rotate.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), in a state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging downward, and the protruding pin 833 is The groove 822 is located at the start point of the first groove 822a (the end opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, the right side in FIG. 61 (b)).

  At this retracted position, the protruding tip end surface of the protruding portion 821a protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the regulating surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 with a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft 811 in response to an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or swinging a gaming machine), the protrusion 821a is applied to the restriction surface 812. The rotation of the arm member 820 can be regulated by making contact, and the rotation can be quickly converged.

  The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is driven to rotate from the state shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B (the arm member 820 is disposed at the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is moved to the left of FIG. When rotated around (counterclockwise), the projecting pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the groove 822 in the first groove 822a (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61 (b)). .

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 61B about the shaft support hole 824. The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is further rotated and the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62B. As a result, the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove 822. Then, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position.

  Here, also in a conventional gaming machine, a first axis (corresponding to the axis 811), a moving member (corresponding to the arm member 820) rotated around the first axis, and a driving force is applied to the moving member. There is a drive motor (corresponding to the drive motor 830) that rotates the moving member around the first axis by the drive force of the drive means (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position (corresponding to the overhang position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted (that is, the moving member is held at the raised position) by making the driving force of the driving motor oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member). Therefore, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the swing operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the arm member 820 can be released by mechanically holding the arm member 820 at the extended position so that the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released. Energy consumption required to hold the position can be suppressed.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B (the projecting pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is disposed at the overhanging position. In the state immediately after), the drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62 (b), so that the projecting pin 833 becomes the groove 822 as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). The second groove 822b is moved (accepted).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a concave portion is formed in one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a. In the state where the arm member 820 is disposed at the overhanging position, the projecting pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on one inner wall surface of the first groove 822a facing each other). Since the projecting pin 833 is received in the recessed portion, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the extended position (the arm member 820 is centered on the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). Can be controlled). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position, and the consumption of the drive motor 830 required to hold the arm member 820 at the extended position accordingly. Energy can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the projecting pin 833 and the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811) with respect to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. ) And the inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the projecting pin 833 is located are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Formed as follows.

  Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b is directed in a direction that coincides with the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Even if the arm member 820 is rotated to press the protruding pin 833 and the protruding pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

  Therefore, in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, for example, even when the player swings or swings the gaming machine and the arm member 820 is shaken, the arm member 820 is supported by the shaft support hole. Rotation about 824 (shaft 811) can be restricted, and as a result, it can be reliably held in the overhang position.

  In this case, as described above, the arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b In the state of being arranged at the (connection position), it matches the arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when the projecting pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b (that is, when the state transitions from the state shown in FIG. 63 to the state shown in FIG. 64). Since the movement locus of the projecting pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b are matched, it is possible to avoid fluctuations in the posture of the arm member 820 disposed at the overhang position. it can.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position, the posture of the arm member 820 at the extended position is suppressed from changing (while maintained in the stopped state). The protruding pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b, and the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the extended position.

  Here, the groove 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 (side away from the shaft support hole 824) (of the first groove 822a). Even in the case of a shape in which a concave portion is formed on the inner wall surface opposite to the shaft support hole 824 of the inner wall surfaces facing each other, the arm member 820 is mechanically held as in the case of the present embodiment. Is possible. However, in this case, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when the projecting pin 833 is moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b after the arm member 820 is disposed at the extended position. As a result, the control becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation decreases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape (first shape) in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the shaft support hole 824 side (the side close to the shaft support hole 824). 1), the arm member 820 is moved to the retracted position without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830. The arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the extended position by disposing the pin 833 from the first position to the extended position and moving (receiving) the recessed pin 833 into the second groove 822b. As a result, the control can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the opening / closing first gear 451 and the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the rotating second gear 462 are formed as through holes in the main body portions 451a and 462a in the composite operation unit 400 has been described. However, the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 may be recessed with a bottom. Even in the case of a bottomed recess, it is possible to position the mounting position etc. by inserting a jig into the recess by the same method as in the above embodiment, but compared with the case where it is formed as a through hole. Thus, the rigidity of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 can be secured, so that the durability can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 are made non-parallel opening and closing by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are the same, and the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 are non-parallel opening and closing. Of course, it is possible.

  In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the rack portion 481b and the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 and the rack portion 481b. Although the case where the ratio is the same has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear of the second pinion leg member 483 are not necessarily limited thereto. The gear ratio between the portion 483c and the rack portion 481b may be a different gear ratio. Thereby, the opening / closing operation | movement of the operation members 491 and 492 can be made into non-parallel opening / closing, and an effect can be heightened.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are engaged with the rack portion 481b in the composite operation unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 meshes with the rack part 481b, and the other can rotate to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 without meshing with the rack part 481b. It is also possible to just support it. Thereby, the opening / closing operation | movement of the operation members 491 and 492 can be made into non-parallel opening / closing, and an effect can be heightened.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation members 491, 492 in the composite operation unit 400, the operation of continuously rotating the rotation first gear 461 and the opening / closing first gear 451 from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the unit of operation within the range of the rotation angles θ0 to θ4.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the insertion shaft 531c is arranged in two rows in a row on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531 in the first combined operation unit 500, but is not necessarily limited thereto. The number of the insertion shafts 531c in each row may be two or less, or may be four or more.

  In the first embodiment, in the first combined operation unit 500, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are inserted into the central insertion shaft 531c among the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541 are connected to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c among the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically. Two link members 542 may be connected.

  In the first embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the retaining ring E is used as a retaining member for the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c inserted into the shaft support hole 541a and the slide hole 541c of the first link member 541. While the mounting or fastening screw is fastened, the connection shaft 526 inserted through the connection hole 541b has been described with respect to the case where the mounting of the retaining ring E as a retaining or the fastening of the fastening screw is omitted. It is not limited, and it is only necessary that at least one of these three locations is fitted with a retaining ring E as a retaining stopper or fastened with a fastening screw.

<Detailed Description of Control Processing in the Present Embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Are used, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 87). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing a special symbol reserved ball, and a special symbol reserved ball execution area is provided. It has been. In each area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 is set in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Each is stored.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the through gates 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 87).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 68A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot if it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 68 (a)) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (see FIG. 68 (a)) for the low probability of the special symbol are the main ones. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7” is stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability. Stored. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0-9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first jackpot type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 68 (b)), the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” is “jackpot A ( 16R probability variation big hit) ". The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B (16R normal jackpot)”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 68 (b)). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 87) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 69A to 69B) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202d has at least a jackpot variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 69A) and a departure variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 69B). Although omitted in the present embodiment, a dedicated variation pattern selection table in each of the game states for time reduction and probability change may be set so as to be switched depending on the game state.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol 1 that starts the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 at the start of the fluctuation, respectively, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, The variation pattern is selected. Here, the variation pattern to be determined is a rough type and variation time of the variation pattern. Various variations of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined as variation patterns to be selected when the common determination result of “big hit A” and “big hit B” is big hit. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern, and the determination result is correct, the variation pattern is determined based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. When the determination result is a win, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the value of the number of holdings. Here, when the determination result is a win, the variation pattern that becomes “super reach” is set more easily than “normal reach”. Therefore, if the determination result is a win, the frequency of the “super reach” variation pattern is executed and the number of jackpots increases. It is easy to have expectations.

  It should be noted that the normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, which is a variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot, is subjected to a reach display mode in which the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed for a predetermined time. This is a variable display mode in which the variable display is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the main symbol of the reach display mode after the variable display. The variation pattern of the “normal reach” jackpot is composed of a relatively short variation time compared to the variation pattern of the “super reach” jackpot described later.

  Super reach jackpot variation patterns A to C, which are jackpot variation patterns of “super reach”, are displayed in the reach display mode, as in the case of normal reach jackpot variation pattern A, and then the characters are displayed, and the reach display mode is displayed. The effect of whether or not the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed in is executed. The variation pattern of “super reach” is configured with a variation time relatively longer than the variation pattern of “normal reach”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69 (b), the deviation variation pattern table which is the variation pattern selection table 202d for deviation will be described. As a variation pattern to be selected when the result of determining whether the special symbol is wrong or not, as a variation pattern for removal, “short-time out (for short time)”, “long-time out (for short time)”, “ “Normal reach out” and “Super reach out” are defined. The short-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “short-time deviation”, is composed of a fluctuation time (800 ms) shorter than other fluctuation patterns, and is displayed in the main display for a predetermined time without being displayed in the reach display mode. Is displayed in a variable manner, the display mode in which the main symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. The long-time deviation fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern of “long-time deviation”, is configured with a fluctuation time (12000 ms) longer than the short-time deviation fluctuation pattern. The normal reach loss variation pattern, which is a variation pattern of “normal reach failure”, is displayed in a different display mode by the middle symbol row Z2 being finally stopped and displayed in a pattern different from the reach display pattern for the normal reach jackpot variation pattern. It is a display mode which shows that the constituted lottery result is out of place. This normal reach deviation variation pattern is configured to be more easily selected than a super reach deviation variation pattern, which will be described later, when the determination result is unacceptable. Moreover, the super reach loss variation pattern that is “super reach loss” is a display mode that is different from the various super reach jackpot variation patterns in that it is finally displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss.

  When the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is out of proportion, the ratio of the variation pattern to be selected depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols at the start of variation is 0 to 2 or 3 to 4 The variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern so that they are different from each other.

  When the number of reserves is 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is not assigned to the variation pattern of “deviating for a short time” and is not selected. As a result, when the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the variation time of the selected variation pattern becomes relatively long, and during this time, it is easy to make the game ball enter the first start port 64a and the second winning port 640. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which the game lottery is not executed).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is 3 to 4, a large ratio is set for selecting a variation pattern of “deviating for a short time”. Accordingly, when the number of reserved pieces is close to the upper limit number of 3-4 pieces, a short variation pattern can be easily selected, so that even if the player enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, It is possible to suppress problems that result in invalid balls exceeding the number of reserves.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right through gate 67, and the RAM 203 Are stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol win is set by the normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is If the value of the winning random number set by the normal hit random number table 202c matches, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. Also, this normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) is used for the normal symbol when the probability is low (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability that the normal symbol is hit from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for a high high probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a short time state), and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. Further, the normal symbol type and the long time type are set as the normal symbol type, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set for each.

  Here, in the normal winning of the normal symbol, in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), in the big hit gaming state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the opened state with an opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. Further, during the time reduction and the probability variation period, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the opening time of 1 second is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long hit is a hit that is repeated twice for the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in the open time of 1 second regardless of the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed in the probability variation period is set to be the same as the opening operation for a long time, but not limited to that. The opening operation may be performed. Specifically, for example, for 3 seconds, the opening operation may be performed once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ball enter the second winning opening 640 more when hitting for a long time, making it easy to execute the change display with the special symbol 2 during the normal game, The change of the game effect can be enjoyed by the player by the change display of the special symbol 2 in which the notice display with a fresh taste is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), if the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 20 at the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol normal It is determined that it is a win. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is normal.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be lowered, and the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is centered on making the ball enter the first start port 64a, and it is possible to increase the profit of the game store side by increasing the consumption of the game ball of the player. On the other hand, in the short time and high probability period with high probability, the opportunity to operate the electric accessory 640a can be given with a probability of “1 / 1.2”, and the chance to enter the second winning opening 640 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state advantageous to the player while suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball. Therefore, a player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play a game for a longer time.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 20”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “○” is lit. Thereafter, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first start port 64a is opened only "0.2 seconds x once" when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the ordinary hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 11A) for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second prize opening 640 is further reduced. However, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, so that the ball can easily enter the first start port 64a. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened “only once per second × 2” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 87).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. 66, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 66, the stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 87), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 88) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 85) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, and a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. , An hour / medium counter 203e, a probability variation flag 203f, and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the acquired data includes four pieces of data. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) In the vacant area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area having an area number smaller by 1. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S404 in FIG. 82). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 82).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 80 and S405 in FIG. 82). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 83).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, the second random number counter C4 The value is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 84). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (FIG. 84, S703: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203e.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot type is “big jackpot B”, the hour / minute counter 203e is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 80). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203e becomes 0 (S217 in FIG. 80).

  When the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the normal random number table 202c for high probability is used (see FIG. 68 (c)). On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is drawn on the basis of the normal time random number table 202c (see FIG. 68 (c)) for the low probability, the normal symbol lottery is performed. A lottery is performed (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 83).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 85) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 70A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a sub variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal background selection table 222b, a normal background notice selection table 222c, and a forced background notice selection table 222d. Yes. Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, and a stop A type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a background selection counter 223g, a variation mode selection counter 223h, a time effect execution flag 223j, a set time storage area 223k, an effect mode storage area 223n, a normal background mode storage area 223o, and other storage areas 223z. At least.

  The sub variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The variation display mode of the special symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice content, the lamp It is a data table for selecting variation patterns, such as lighting modes. Note that the fluctuation pattern output from the main controller 110 specifies a rough fluctuation mode, such as fluctuation time, reach, non-reach, and the like, and the audio lamp controller 113 provides detailed contents based on the contents. Is determined.

  Details of the sub variation pattern selection table 222a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. This sub variation pattern selection table 222a corresponds to a sub variation pattern selection table 222a (see FIG. 71) dedicated to the normal background mode, corresponding to a set background mode type (normal background mode or forced background mode) described later. It consists of at least a sub variation pattern selection table 222a (see FIG. 72) dedicated to the forced background mode. In addition, there is a dedicated table or the like when the time is short or the probability is changing, but illustration and explanation thereof are omitted.

  Although details will be described later in this embodiment, the background mode is set according to the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the normal background mode, four types of modes A to D are determined by lottery, and a background image corresponding to the mode is set. There are four types of background images: sea (normal A) as mode A, mountain (normal B) as mode B, river (normal C) as mode C, and valley (normal D) as mode D. It is set as the background image of the 3 symbol display device 81. In the forced background mode, a background image displayed during the time effect period is set. During the time production period, the background image in the sea is displayed and the remaining period of the time production period is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a notice effect mode corresponding to the selected background mode is selected. As the notice effect mode, a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a sound effect, a lighting mode such as a lamp, and the like are set.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the normal background mode is configured such that each variation pattern is selected based on a variation mode selection counter (not shown) corresponding to the determination result. ing. Note that there is only one type of variation pattern of short out and long out, which is the variation pattern selected when the result of the determination is wrong, so that the main control device regardless of the variation mode selection counter selected. In accordance with the type of variation pattern output from 110, a variation pattern that is too short or too long is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in the sub variation pattern selection table dedicated to the forced background mode, each variation pattern corresponds to the determination result in the same manner as the sub variation pattern selection table dedicated to the normal background mode. It is configured to be selected based on the value. The content of the selected variation pattern is different from the sub variation pattern selection table dedicated to the normal background mode and the sub variation pattern selection table dedicated to the forced background mode in that a background dedicated to the time effect period is selected. Although there is no change in the variation time and variation type (out of reach, out of reach, per reach, etc.) of the selected variation pattern, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is different. In the sub-variation pattern selection table dedicated to the forced background, the variation pattern is dedicated to the time effect period, and specifically, the effect in the sea corresponding to the background image is mainly displayed.

  The normal background selection table 222b is a data table for determining the normal background mode. FIG. 73 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal background selection table 222b. When selecting a variation pattern, the normal background selection table 222b acquires a value of a background selection counter 223g, which will be described later, and corresponds to the value and the type of variation pattern to be selected (reach type, short / long out, etc.). The normal background mode set to the determination value is selected by collating with the determination value set in this way.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, when the determination result is a win and the type of the variation pattern to be selected is normal reach, the normal background mode A determination value is “0 to 15”, the normal background “16 to 60” is set as the determination value for mode B, “61 to 90” is set as the determination value for normal background mode C, and “91 to 100” is set as the determination value for normal background mode D. Here, since the background selection counter 223g is a counter value that is updated in the main process in the range of “0 to 198”, when the value of the background selection counter 223g that is not set as the determination value is acquired. Will not change the normal background mode. Even when the same normal background mode as the normal background mode currently set in the normal background mode storage area 223o is selected, the change of the normal background mode is not executed.

  In the normal background selection table 222b, since the determination value is set so that the normal background mode D is selected only when the determination of success / failure is successful, the normal background mode D is selected and the background of the valley is the first. When displayed on the three-symbol display device 81, it can be determined early that it is a big hit. Therefore, the player can play the game in the hope that it will switch to the background of the valley and display it, and can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  Further, in the normal background selection table 222b, if the result of the determination is correct, the normal background mode A is set to be less likely to be selected than when the result is a failure, and conversely, the normal background modes B to C are not correct. It is easier to select the case of winning than the case of being set. As a result, the player expects that if the background image of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to any one of the normal background modes B to C at the start of the variation of the special symbol, it will be a big hit. be able to. In particular, the normal background mode C is set to be more easily selected than the normal background mode B when the determination result is a big hit, and the background image corresponding to the normal background mode D is displayed. And it can make the player have expectations for the jackpot.

  In addition, even if the background image corresponding to the normal background mode B or C is switched to the background image corresponding to the normal background mode A even if the change of the special symbol is out of place, the expectation of the big hit Can continue to be held by the player. For example, even when a background image corresponding to the normal background mode A is displayed, it is set to be selected when the success / failure determination is a big hit, so there is no expectation for the big hit and the game Can be disappointing.

  The normal background notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74 (a)) is a selection table for selecting a notice display mode (preliminary content) corresponding to the selected normal background mode. While the special symbol is fluctuated on the three symbol display device 81, a character image, a character, or the like for indicating to the player the determination result of the special symbol being fluctuated is displayed. In addition, as the notice display mode selected in the normal background notice selection table 222c, a dedicated notice display form is set corresponding to the selected normal background mode.

  Specifically, in the normal A-only notices 1-3 selected when the normal background mode A is selected, sea creatures (eg, crabs, dolphins, etc.) are selected, and the normal B-only notices 1-3. Then, mountain creatures (for example, frogs, bears, etc.) are selected, and in normal C-only notices 1-3, river creatures (for example, medaka, amembo, etc.) are selected, and usually D-only notices 1-3, It is preset so that creatures in the valley (for example, cranes, hawks, etc.) are selected.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the normal background notice selection table 222c, the determination result of the effect counter 223f is divided into divergences for each normal background mode, and the determination result of the special symbol being changed is divided. Is set for each notice display sun. The effect counter 223f is a counter value that is updated in the same manner as other counters every time the main process (see FIG. 87) is executed in the range of “0 to 198” (the process is not shown). When a counter value not set in the normal background notice selection table 222c is acquired, the notice display mode is not selected. In addition, since the notice display mode is set more easily in each normal background mode than the case where the determination result is a win, the player can be selected by selecting the notice display form. Can expect that the lottery result of the special symbol that is changing is a win. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in anticipation of displaying the notice display mode.

  The notice display mode set in the normal background notice selection table 222c is based on the normally selected normal background mode even when the forced background is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The configuration is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to display various notice display modes even when the forced background mode is set. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early. In addition, as will be described later, since a notice display mode dedicated to the forced background mode is also displayed, it is possible for the player to predict the expected degree of jackpot by combining each notice display form.

  The forced background notice selection table 222d (see FIG. 74B) is for the forced background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the forced background mode is set (when the time effect period is set). It is a selection table for selecting the notice display mode. As the notice display mode dedicated to the forced background mode, forced notices 1 to 4 are set, respectively, and a notice display form such as a school of fish or a carp is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the determination value of the effect counter 223f is set for each notice display mode corresponding to the determination result. Here, since it is set so that the notice display mode is more easily selected than the case where the result of winning / failing determination is winning, the player is changing due to the selection of the notice display form. It can be expected that the determination result of the special symbol is a win. In addition, when the forced background mode is set, as described above, the notice display mode of the normal background mode is set. Therefore, even when the notice display mode dedicated to the forced background mode is not selected, By selecting the background mode notice display mode, it is possible to have more expectation for the jackpot. In addition, since many types of notice display modes are easily displayed, it is possible to play a game with the expectation of shifting to the forced background mode.

  Next, returning to FIG. 70 (b), the contents of the RAM of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The winning information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, a big jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state and displays a short time period (notifies the player of the game value (ordinary time period of normal symbol) given to the player after the jackpot ends) Or, it is an effect for performing a definite effect display (notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the special symbol lottery that is on hold).

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the ending command from the main control device 110, the winning information storing area 223a is referred to, and the stored winning information includes the winning information indicating the jackpot of the special symbol. If there is winning information indicating the special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type corresponding to the winning information is acquired.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls on the variable display is added by entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or the main controller 110 changes the special symbol. When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 30). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the second symbol. Based on the number-of-holding ball number command of the second symbol received from the main control device 110, the number of the holding ball indicated by the command is stored.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 93). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 91), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 93). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223f is an effect counter value used when the audio lamp control device 113 executes a notice display mode, an effect lottery, or the like. The effect counter 223f is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 198”. Although not shown, the update counter 223f is updated by a main process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113. Is executed. The effect counter 223f is configured to be updated by counting in software, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be updated by a counter circuit that counts using a clock terminal or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to update at high speed irrespective of the control processing of the MPU 221, and thus it is possible to suppress a problem that the same counter value is selected every time.

  The background selection counter 223g is a counter for selecting the normal background mode from the normal background selection table 222b. The background selection counter 223g is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 198”. The background selection counter 223g is set to have a different update frequency so as to be updated in the main process (see FIG. 90) in the same manner as the effect counter 223f but is not synchronized with the effect counter 223f. Yes. Thereby, it can suppress that the background selection counter 223g and the production | presentation counter 223f synchronize.

  The variation effect mode selection counter 223h is a counter used when a variation pattern is selected from the sub variation pattern selection table 222a. This variation effect mode selection counter 223h is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 198”. The fluctuating effect mode selection counter 223h is updated in the main process (see FIG. 90), but the update frequency is different so that it is not synchronized with the effect counter 223f and the background selection counter 223g. Is set to

  The set time storage area 223k is a storage area in which time information for executing a time effect is stored. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the current time information is acquired from the RTC 292 by the process of S1221 of the time setting process (FIG. 89, S1212) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The Then, by the process of S1224, a start time for executing a time effect of 10 minutes is calculated every hour from the acquired time, and the start time until 24 hours elapse is stored in the set time storage area 223k. Is done. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 sets the mode B indicating that it is a time effect period when the time of the set time storage area 223k is reached, and sets the special symbol variation pattern as the sub variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the forced background mode. (See FIG. 72). When it is determined that the time effect period of 10 minutes has passed, the effect mode A other than the time effect period is set, and switching is performed so that the change pattern is selected from the sub-variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal background mode. It is done.

  Thereby, by connecting to a power supply device in advance so that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be powered on at the same time, and turning on the power collectively, the same power-on time is obtained in each pachinko machine 10, The start period of the same time effect can be stored in the time setting storage area 223k. Therefore, each pachinko machine 10 starts a time effect at the same timing and is switched to a background image (in this embodiment, an underwater image) corresponding to the selection of the variation pattern or the forced background mode. A striking sense of unity can be performed.

  The effect mode storage area 223n is a storage area in which data indicating either the effect mode A that is an effect mode other than the time effect period or the effect mode B that is an effect mode during the time effect period is stored. The type of the sub variation pattern selection table 222a to be selected and determined by determining the current mode state based on the data set in the effect mode storage area 223n is switched.

  The normal background mode storage area 223o is a storage area in which data indicating the type of the normal background mode selected from the normal background selection table 222b is stored. The background image corresponding to the normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the effect mode A other than the time effect period is set. When the effect mode B within the time effect period is set, the background image corresponding to the forced background mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the period during which the effect mode B is set Even so, the process of switching the normal background mode is executed, and the type of the normal background mode determined by this process is stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o.

  In the present embodiment, even in the period of the effect mode B in which the forced background mode is set, the notice display mode of the normal background mode is set to the type of the normal background mode set in the normal background mode storage area 223o. Based on the selection, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even within the time effect period, the data stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o is updated, so that the displayed notice display mode can be switched, and various effects are provided to the player. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data used in game processing, a counter, a flag, and the like are set.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 91) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 95) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 95) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 78) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 97B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 95).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display a power-on main image (not shown). It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, display the image for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, display the image indicating that after the stopping of the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the first winning opening 64 is entered. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol composed of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, an effect mode storage area 233m, and a background change flag 233n.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, As the balls easily enter the first winning port 64, the number of winning balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The back surface type describes information for specifying a background image (any of sea, mountain, river, valley, and underwater) corresponding to the normal background modes A to D and the forced background mode. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the above back image is to be displayed.

  The MPU 231 is set in the normal background image storage area 223o if it is specified to display any one of the normal background modes A to D and the forced background mode depending on the back surface type. In the normal background mode (determined by a command output based on the fact that the audio lamp control device 113 has updated the normal background mode), if the production mode is B, the rear image corresponding to the forced background mode is specified as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the background image, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 76) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 78) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 77 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 77).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 77, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 78) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 77, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1805 in FIG. 95). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 105 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 97B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 97 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 97) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 97 (b) (see S2109). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 98 to 101) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 102 to 104) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 105A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 105B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 106) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 78) in which the image drawing instruction content is generated is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 78) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 78), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 97 (b) ) (See S2103)), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 104) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 78), and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed (FIG. 97 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 102). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 106). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 106). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 107).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 97B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 107).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The effect mode storage area 233m is a storage area in which data corresponding to the effect mode indicated by the display effect command output based on the effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113 is stored.

  The rear surface change flag 233n is a flag indicating that a display rear surface command has been received from the sound lamp control device 113. This back change flag 233n is displayed in S2701 of the display back command processing (FIG. 101, S2213) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 113 when the display back command output from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. Turned on by processing. On the other hand, in the process of S3414 of the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 106, S3303), it is set to OFF.

  The background change flag 233n is used to determine when it is time to change the back image, and the display mode is changed to a back image indicated by a back image determination flag 233o described later and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Processing is executed.

  The background image determination flag 233o is a storage area in which a flag corresponding to the background image indicated by the display rear command output from the sound lamp control device 113 is stored. In the present embodiment, a dedicated back image determination flag 233o corresponding to each of the normal background modes A to D (sea, mountain, river, valley) and a dedicated back image determination flag 233o corresponding to the forced background mode are set in advance. The back image discrimination flag 233o corresponding to the received command is set to ON. Note that the other back image discrimination flag 233o is set to off based on the newly set back image discrimination flag 233o being on.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 79 to 87. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, 299, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 87) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, a special symbol variation start process is executed (S208). Note that the special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 81, but a process of starting variation of the first symbol and the third symbol (starting dynamic display) is executed. The On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the lottery result this time is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what type of jackpot type out of two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type If the jackpot is A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability variation period (S213). Thereafter, the process of S215 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot B, 100 is set in the hour / minute counter 203e of the RAM 203 (S214). Thereafter, the process of S215 is executed. Then, in the process of S215, the start of a special symbol jackpot is set (S215), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203e (S217), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 80) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area is acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S302). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S303. In the process of S303, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the process of S304, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability ( S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “7” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits the same match, Judged to be a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S305: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the two types of special symbols jackpot (jackpot A, Among jackpots B), it is determined what kind of jackpot. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), “60 to If it is in the range of “99”, it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times for a short period of normal symbols).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the normal hit, super Determine the fluctuation time of the design fluctuation such as reach. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. As a variation pattern for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach” are specified. Various types of “reach” are defined, and “common normal reach”, “common super reach”, and “shared special reach” are defined as fluctuation patterns of common hit / miss.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the deviation variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 69 (b)) is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. )) To determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as complete deviation, normal reach, and super reach.

  When the processing of S307 or S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 87). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 79), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, and the starting winning is determined. Is a process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and prefetching the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 82, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no winning at the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c (N ) Is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), The value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 87) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, each counter value acquired in S407, the current gaming state (whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state), and each data of the holding ball stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on the above, it determines the determination result at the start of the fluctuation (S407). The lottery result is prefetched because the process of S407 is determined before the determination result of the special symbol is determined at the start of the variation.

  It is determined whether the prefetching determination result in the processing of S407 is a big hit (S408). When it is determined that the pre-reading determination result is a jackpot (S408: Yes), a jackpot winning command is set (S409). This jackpot winning command indicates to the sound lamp control device 113 that the prefetching result is a jackpot, and a command indicating the information of each counter value acquired in S406 and the determination result is generated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S408 that the prefetching result is out of place (S408: No), a out-of-winning command corresponding to the stop type is set (S410). This missed winning command is a command that indicates to the audio lamp control device 113 that the result of the prefetching judgment is missed, and a command that can also discriminate information on each counter value acquired in S406 is generated. After the processes of S409 and S410 are executed, this process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 19), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the motor associated with the second winning opening 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour / short counter 203e is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), the player hits a ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening as much as possible. The special prize opening 65a is provided immediately below the second prize opening 640. Therefore, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second prize opening 640 during the special symbol jackpot, There are many balls in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 68C), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 68C). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 68 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the probability normal random number table 202c (see FIG. 68C), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 68C). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-20”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 21-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal design.

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes). The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 Is set to 1 second and the number of releases is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first start port 64a is set to 0. 0. While setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first start port 64a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first start port 64a.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 87) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 87) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 79), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 84, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S703). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203d The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed when the occurrence information of the power-off is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 79), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 79) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 80) or the start winning process (see FIG. 82) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the round number command and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 87) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a has elapsed, or a ball is in the specific winning opening 65a. Determine if you have won the specified number. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 83), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 81), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 81) or the process of S309 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 81). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). When the second symbol variation time is set, the second symbol display device 83 starts the variation display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 83), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The change display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 85 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting the value to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1318 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 90). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 88, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 90), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 90). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1208 is performed via the processes of S1204 to S1206. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. Then, the time setting process is executed (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the time setting process (S1212) which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time setting process (S1212).

  In the time setting process (FIG. 89, S1212), first, current time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). Here, the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with an RTC 292 capable of measuring the current time. The RTC 292 is provided with power supply means (button battery or the like) that can operate even when power is not supplied from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, even if it is in the state where the electric power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10, time can be timed.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, the RTC 292 has time information set by a predetermined jig so that time information measured by the RTC 292 attached to each pachinko machine 10 is synchronized in advance. Thereby, it becomes the structure which can time-measure information synchronized with RTC292 of each pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  It is determined whether the time information acquired in the process of S1221 is within the time limit data (in this embodiment, within 3 years) (S1222). When it is determined that the time information is within the time limit (S1222: Yes), the time effect execution flag 223j is set to ON (S1223). Based on the acquired time information, a time effect period is calculated and set in the set time storage area 223k (S1224). Here, in this embodiment, the effect which switches to the background image only for time effects and a fluctuation pattern is performed as a time effect every hour. Therefore, in the process of S1224, the time when 1 hour has elapsed from the time information acquired in the process of S1221 is calculated as the start time of the first time effect, and then another hour has elapsed since the time effect period of 10 minutes. The time is set as the second time production period. Similarly, the start time of the time effect between 24 hours after the time acquired in S1221 is calculated and stored in the set time storage area 223k. Normally, the business hours of pachinko parlors are 14 hours from 9:00 to 23:00, so if a start time of 24 hours is set, even if the business hours are somewhat longer, it can be handled.

  In this embodiment, the power-on time is acquired from the RTC 292, and the start time of the time effect is calculated and set from the time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power-on time is stored. The time information of the RTC 292 may be determined, and a time effect may be executed when a predetermined time (1 hour in the present embodiment) has elapsed. Further, the start timing of the time effect may be determined by setting a counter for 60 minutes based on the power-on time acquired from the RTC 292 and updating the counter.

  If it is determined in the process of S1222 that the acquired time information is out-of-date data, this process ends. Here, since the time effect execution flag 223j remains off, the time effect is not executed. In this way, since the time effect is set not to be executed after three years have elapsed, the power of the battery, which is the internal power source of the RTC 292, is reduced, the timing accuracy is reduced, and the RTC 292 of each pachinko machine 10 is Due to variations in the time of time measurement, it is possible to suppress a problem that the start timing of the time effect varies among the pachinko machines 10.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1311, the command determination process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of the command determination processing (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, a variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1312 is completed, a synchronous effect management process is executed (S1313). This synchronized effect management process (S1313) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1317: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1319), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern selection process is executed (S1403).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 92, the details of the variation pattern selection processing (S1403) will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S1403).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1403), first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1501). Next, the value of the background selection counter 223g is acquired. Thereafter, based on the acquired value of the background selection counter 223g, a background mode type is selected from the normal background selection table 223b (see FIG. 73) (S1503). Here, when the same background mode as the currently selected normal background mode is selected, the same background mode is set. On the other hand, when a different background mode is selected, the background mode is set, and the change of the displayed background is set. On the other hand, even when the background selection counter has no background mode setting, the background mode is not changed, and the currently set background mode is maintained as it is.

  In the processing of S1503, it is determined whether or not a normal background mode different from the normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223o has been selected, that is, whether or not the normal background mode has been changed (S1504). If it is determined that the change of the normal background mode has been selected (S1504: Yes), the normal background mode selected in the process of S1503 is set (stored) in the normal background mode storage area 223o (S1505). A display background command indicating the selected normal background mode (indicating the normal background mode newly set in the normal background mode storage area 223o in the processing of S1505) is set (S1506). Thereafter, the process of S1507 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1504 that there is no change in the normal background mode (S1504: No), the process of S1507 is executed.

  In the processing of S1507, it is determined whether or not the effect mode currently set in the effect mode storage area 223n is effect mode A (a gaming state other than the time effect period). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1507: Yes), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired, and based on the value, the sub variation pattern selection table 222a (dedicated to the normal background mode) ( 71), a variation pattern corresponding to the type indicated by the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 is selected (S1508). Based on the selected normal background mode (normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223n) and the value of the effect counter 223f, the advance notice is given from the normal background notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74 (a)). A production mode is selected and set (S1509). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1507, when it is determined that the set effect mode is not effect mode A, that is, effect mode B (S1507: No), the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired and the value is obtained. Based on the above, the variation pattern corresponding to the type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected from the sub variation pattern selection table 222a (see FIG. 72) dedicated to the forced background mode (S1510). Based on the selected normal background mode (normal background mode stored in the normal background mode storage area 223n) and the value of the effect counter 223f, an advance notice is made from the normal background notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74 (a)). A production mode is selected and set (S1511). Based on the value of the selected effect counter 223f, the notification effect mode is selected and set from the forced background notification selection table 222d (see FIG. 74B) (S1512).

  In this way, during the time effect period in which the effect mode B is set, the background image corresponding to the forced background mode is switched and displayed, but the notice effect corresponding to the normal background mode is also changed to the forced background mode. Corresponding notice effects can also be selected and displayed. Thereby, various notice effects can be displayed even in the forced background mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player becomes bored during the time production period.

  In addition, as shown in the processing after S1507, when the time effect period is in progress, the notice effect only for the forced background mode and the notice effect only for the normal background mode are selected. Here, even during the time production period, the change process of the normal background mode is performed at the time of setting the variation pattern, so it is possible to switch the type of notice to be selected even during the time production period, which is rich in change The notice effect can be displayed even during the time effect period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Next, returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of S1401 (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 93) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, if a reserved ball number command is received (S1407: Yes), a held ball number command receiving process is executed (S1408).

  In the processing of S1407, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1407: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1409). When a winning command is received (S1409: Yes), the winning information indicated by the received winning command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S1410). Thereafter, the process returns to the main process. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are respectively stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b. Further, as soon as each value of each of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original value of each of the counters C1 to C2 is obtained from the original value separately from the big special lottery drawing of the special symbol. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S1409, if no winning command has been received (S1409: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1419). Return to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process (FIG. 93, S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 91). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 91), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1708). Based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1709). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the synchronous effect management process (S1313) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 90) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the contents of the synchronous effect management process (S1313). In this synchronized production management process (S1313), time information is determined from the RTC 292, and the current production mode is the period of the production mode A (outside the time production period) or the period of the production mode B (in the time production period). It is discriminate | determined whether it is, and the process which performs switching of effect mode is performed.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 94, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the time effect execution flag 223j is set to ON (S1710). If it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223j is off (S1710: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time effect execution flag 223j is on (S1710: Yes), time information “hour, minute” is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1711). It is determined whether the production mode B is set (S1712). When it is determined that the effect mode B is not set, that is, the effect mode A is set (S1712: No), the time information (time information) acquired in S1711 is stored in the set time storage area 223k. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the time effect period being performed (S1713). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect period (S1713: Yes), data corresponding to the effect mode B is set in the effect mode storage area 223n (S1714). A display effect command indicating the transition to effect mode B is set for display control device 114 (S1715). A display background command for instructing the display control device 114 to change to a background image corresponding to the forced background mode is set (S1716). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1712, when it is determined that the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223n is the effect mode B (S1712: Yes), the acquired time information is the effect start period (the effect start timing). It is determined whether it is outside (period of 10 minutes) (S1717). If it is determined that it is outside the production start period (S1717: Yes), data corresponding to the production mode A is set in the production mode storage area 223n (S1718). A display effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the transition to the effect mode A is set (S1719). A display background command for notifying the display control device 114 of changing to a background image corresponding to the set normal background mode is set (S1720).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 107, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 95, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 95). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 95) (S1905), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all the boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 96, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 105A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 105A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97 (b)), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2108 in FIG. 97 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 97 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) can be immediately displayed during the variation rendering period, and a simple variation rendering can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97A, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 97 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 97 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 78) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that the normal effect image is displayed instead of the above power-on image. In order to display on the three-symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. 78 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach completely The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to the missed and chance chances) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 98, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 99 (a). FIG. 99A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach, or complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401), and the stop type is determined. Comparing the table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97 (b)) is executed, the stop after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The symbol is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2206 that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is determined whether there is a display effect command (S2208). If it is determined that there is a display effect command (S2208: Yes), display effect command processing is executed (S2209).

  Here, the display effect command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100A is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect command process (S2209).

  In the display effect command process (FIG. 100 (a), S2209), first, the effect mode corresponding to the received command is set in the effect mode storage area 233m (S2501). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2208 that there is no display effect command (S2208: No), it is determined whether there is a display notice command (S2210). If it is determined that there is a display notice command (S2210: Yes), display notice command processing is executed (S2211).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100B, the display notice command processing (S2211) will be described. FIG. 100B is a flowchart showing the content of the display notice command process (S2211).

  In the display notice command processing (FIG. 100 (b), S2211), first, a display data table in a notice display mode corresponding to the received command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2601).

  Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2212 that there is no display preview command (S2210: No), it is determined whether a display background command is received (S2212). If it is determined that a display background command has been received (S2212: Yes), display background command processing is executed (S2213).

  Here, the display background command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101A is a flowchart showing the contents of the display background command process (S2213). In the display background command process (FIG. 101, S2213), first, the background change flag 233n is set to ON (S2701). By setting the background change flag 233n to ON, it can be determined that it is time to change the background image.

  It is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating a change to a background image corresponding to the forced background mode (S2702). If it is determined that the command indicates a change to the background image corresponding to the forced background mode (S2702: Yes), the rear image determination flag 233o of the rear image corresponding to the forced background mode is set to ON (S2703). ). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2702 that the command is not a command indicating the forced background mode, that is, a command indicating changing to a background image corresponding to the normal background mode (S2702: No), the effect mode A is set. It is determined whether it is set (S2704). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S2704: Yes), the rear image determination flag 233o corresponding to the changed rear image type is set to ON (S1705). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2704, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S2704: No), this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2212 that there is no display background command (S2212: No), it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2214). (S2214: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2802). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2801, the error type generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S2802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2214 that there is no error command (S2214: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 99 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 99 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 99A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S2103) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 102, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this process ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect has been performed. Therefore, the confirmed display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task processing (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is started, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S3009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table that stipulates that the image (“◯” or “×”) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 105A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). FIG. 105B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3402). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Also, as a result of the process of S3401, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 97 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 97 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 97 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 98 to 101) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 102 to 104) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 106) (see S3301: No in FIG. 105A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502). If it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503), a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the processing of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3506 that the transfer process has not ended (S3506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is determined whether the background change flag 223n is on (S3509). If it is determined that the background change flag 233n is on (S3509: Yes), the background change flag 233n is set to off (S3510), and the corresponding change is made based on the back image discrimination flag 233o that is set to on. A back image is specified and set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233o in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3517 (S3513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 78 is generated (S3601). In other words, in the process of S3601, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V-interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 97B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (the bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing into and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed, The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command and the game state command, the back image and the super reach reach can be changed according to the game state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on to determine that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately by executing the warning image setting process. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and Even if the fourth notice display device is provided and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination of them), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, time shortage hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect are prepared. Good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notification effects different from a variation effect was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when a continuous notification effect was performed, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Instead, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command process (see FIG. 37) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and other stop symbol discrimination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process. Therefore, instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol. Occasionally, chances can be confirmed. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 receives various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of start winning that is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Although the case where the information is included in the number-of-holding balls command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , Information of the stop type selection counter C3) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110 performs a special symbol based on various counters (first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3) acquired at the time of winning a winning in the winning command. The winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 after including various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) indicating the lottery result of the sound, and the sound lamp control device 113 is included in the winning command. Estimate the lottery result of special symbols and the stop type after the changing effect according to various information (whether, stop type, change pattern) and the special symbol lottery result corresponding to the held ball that was put on hold when the winning command was sent I explained about the case of deciding whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect based on the result and the number of held balls held at that time, There is no intention to be limited to this. For example, the main controller 110 determines the values of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, first stop type selection counter C3) corresponding to the start-winning from the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning. May be included in the winning command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 may determine whether to perform the continuous notice effect based on the notified various counter values. Further, main controller 110 may perform the continuous notice effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize and the stop type after the fluctuating effect estimated from the values of various counters acquired at the start prize. And at least the determination result is included in the winning command and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 finally determines whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect based on the determination result. May be determined. Further, it is determined whether or not the main control device 110 performs the continuous notice effect, and the determination result is included in the winning command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 performs the effect of the continuous notice effect. You may make it decide only. As information to be included in the winning command, information on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the estimated starting winning prize, information on the stop type after the changing effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or the continuous notice effect is performed. By using this information, it is possible to reduce the command size of the winning command as compared with the case where the values of various counters are included. In addition, information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated start winning, information on the stop type after the fluctuating effect, information on whether or not the continuous notice effect may be performed, or information on whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed, The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command different from the winning command.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S1410) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 33), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, triggered by the reception of this command. Also good. Thereby, before the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started. The image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous notice effect in a subarea dedicated to the continuous notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. As a result, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous notice effect is the last, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous notice effect while the continuous notice effect is being performed. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern, and each continuous A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. You may make it set to 233d. In other words, the display data table may include a drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and a drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Accordingly, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the image data transfer instruction corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in accordance with reception of the display variation pattern command. Thereby, since it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

  In the above-described embodiment, the stop pattern of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, reach other than out / rear reach, complete out reach) determined by the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variation effect that has been suspended is displayed. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, instead of the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but is always a back-and-forth deviation reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing a continuous notice effect together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, each variation effect will be performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each variation. Further, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the change effect other than the last change effect that has been put on hold is changed to the change effect. Then, the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1704 in FIG. 37) changes the variation pattern in accordance with the setting state of the continuous notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. May be. If the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the change effect is displayed as it is based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 110. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed in the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In the situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first start port 64a is provided in the game board 13 where a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect when receiving the number-of-holding balls command, all the first entrances at that time are determined. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the fluctuating effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is controlled by the main control. Although the case of transmitting from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning command and determines the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at that time. As described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each of the variable effects. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated every time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. It may be provided. In the continuous notice determination process, when a continuous notice effect is performed (S1517: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effect, and the variation pattern of the variable effect that is determined. , A gaming state after the end of a series of continuous notice effects (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, miss), or a combination of two or more thereof. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of a command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence is generated. Various flags such as a flag are generated. Based on the flag, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as a warning image is generated. Or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In the above embodiment, the winning to the first start port 64a and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on a winning at the first starting port 64a is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or the number of four divided areas by the number of held balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 117, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of an effect of rotating the rotating member. The difference is that control is executed to match the stop timing of the variable display with the timing at which the rotating member stops at a predetermined stop position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the element same as 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

<About the production of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108 to FIG. 110, the contents of effects in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a time chart for an example in which pseudo continuous notice is executed in the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo variation based on the winning command output from the main control device 110. Here, the pseudo variation is a variation that makes the variation of the special symbol 1 appear as if it is a variation of the special symbol a plurality of times. In the pseudo variation, the third symbol is completely stopped after the variation start and provisional variation stop several times in the variation time of the special symbol having one symbol. This allows the player to appear to be performing multiple variations. In addition, in the pseudo variation, the number of times of pseudo variation (the number of times that the special symbol starts to vary) is configured so that a larger number of times is more likely to be set when the success / failure determination result is a big hit than when it is out, Even a player who recognizes that this is a pseudo-variation, look forward to seeing how many times the special symbol changes during one change (how many pseudo-variations are set) It can be carried out.

  In the pseudo variation shown in FIG. 108, it is a time chart showing an example in which the number of pseudo variations is set to 4. When the special symbol fluctuation start is set, the fluctuation start is displayed for a predetermined period of time for the first time, then fluctuated for a predetermined time, and then temporarily stopped. In this case, the third symbol is temporarily stopped at a chance such as “335”. During the temporary stop, the third symbol is displayed with the fluctuation of the fluctuation displayed slightly. Even in this temporarily stopped state, the dynamic display of the first symbol is not changed. After a temporary stop for a predetermined period (about 2 seconds), the second pseudo fluctuation is started (the fluctuation indicated by pseudo fluctuation 1).

  FIG. 109A is a diagram showing the third symbol display device 81 and the rotating member 300 when the pseudo variation shown by the pseudo variation 1 is started. Here, as soon as the third symbol starts to change (after 0.5 seconds, etc.), as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the rotating member 300 starts to rotate. Here, after the third symbol starts the second pseudo fluctuation, the rotation of the rotating member 300 is started after a slight delay. The timing at which the rotation member 300 is temporarily stopped and the timing at which the rotating member 300 stops at a predetermined position (in the present embodiment, the position at which “2” is displayed directly above) in a high speed state (see FIG. 110). In order to make them coincide with each other, the rotation of the rotating member 300 is started with a time delay adjusted according to the variation time.

  As shown in FIG. 110, when the pseudo variation time set in the pseudo variation 1 has elapsed, the third symbol is displayed in a combination indicating the chance item “335”. In the present embodiment, the chance symbol is a combination of the left symbol of the third symbol and the middle symbol being the same symbol, and a combination in which only the right symbol is different is set as the chance symbol. The chances may be set as reach, or may be set as appropriate as long as it is a combination other than the jackpot.

  At the timing when the third symbol is temporarily stopped at the chance, the rotating member 300 is stopped at a position where “2” stops right above in the high speed state. Then, on the third symbol display device 81, the characters “continue” indicating that the pseudo fluctuation is continued are displayed. Further, the number shown on the surface of the rotating member 300 indicates the number of times that the pseudo variation is executed, and it is configured so that it is possible to determine how many times the pseudo variation is performed in the variation.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning command is received, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute a pseudo-variation in which a main symbol is variably displayed in a predetermined time in one variation of a special symbol. When it is determined that the pseudo variation is to be executed, the main symbol is variably displayed by the number of times determined by lottery within the variation time determined in advance by the main controller 110. When the main symbol stops until the special symbol variation display time elapses, the main symbol is oscillated and stopped and displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and then the variation symbol is displayed again.

  In addition, the variation time in the pseudo variation is set by lottery according to the number of times of the pseudo variation so that the variation time does not exceed the variation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations is four times, a time equal to or less than the time obtained by dividing the fluctuation time allocated to the type of fluctuation pattern selected in advance by the main controller 110 by four is once. The pseudo-variation time is set by lottery. Then, the variation time is set for the number of times set in the lottery for pseudo variation, and for the last pseudo variation, the total variation time of the pseudo variation selected so far is calculated from the variation time of the special symbol. The subtracted time is set as the fluctuation time.

  Further, when each pseudo variation is started, the rotating member 330 is stopped at a predetermined position so as to notify the player of the number of times. The rotation member 330 is provided with a number indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations on the front side, and when the stop is displayed with the position where the number is displayed at the top, the number displayed at that position. Indicates the current number of pseudo fluctuations.

  The rotating member 330 is controlled to have the same rotational speed every time. Therefore, if the fluctuation times of the pseudo fluctuations are different, it may be difficult to match the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuation and the stop timing of the rotating member 330. However, in the present embodiment, the rotation start timing of the rotating member 330 is delayed and set in accordance with the time of the pseudo variation, respectively, thereby stopping the pseudo variation and the timing of stopping the rotating member 330 at a predetermined position. Can be matched.

  In this embodiment, the rotation start timing is delayed so as to match the timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the rotation member can be varied according to the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation. By doing so, the timing may be adjusted.

  In addition, when adjusting the timing by varying the rotation speed, the rotation speed may be set to be faster each time the number of pseudo fluctuations increases. By setting in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the number of pseudo fluctuations at the rotational speed of the pseudo fluctuations.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The electrical configuration in the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 111A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. The ROM 222 in the second embodiment has a pseudo fluctuation selection table 222e and a pseudo fluctuation seconds selection table 222f added to the first embodiment.

  The pseudo variation selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. If the pseudo variation selection table 222e shows a variation pattern in which the winning command reaches reach when the winning command is received, whether or not to execute the pseudo variation based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. It is executed by lottery.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, in the pseudo fluctuation selection table 222e, the number of pseudo fluctuations is set for each reach type corresponding to each result of the determination of success or failure. In the normal reach, the maximum number of pseudo fluctuations is 2 in the case of winning the lottery result. Further, in the case of winning, the maximum number of times for super reach and special reach is four times, and in the case of being off, it is three times. Thereby, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 4, the player can recognize that the determination result is a big hit. Therefore, when the pseudo variation is started, the player can play the game with the expectation that the pseudo variation is continuously executed and is not continued up to four times.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 112, a plurality of pseudo fluctuation times are set for each reach type, and the judgment value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each of the numbers. When the acquired value of the effect counter 223f matches the determination value, the number of pseudo fluctuations set in the determination value is set. Further, when the value of the effect counter 223f that is not set as the determination value is acquired, the lottery is performed unless the pseudo variation is executed.

  In addition, the number of determination values is set to be large so that the pseudo-variation is more easily selected when the determination result is correct. As a result, when the pseudo-variation is started, the player can play a game with an expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, the player can play a game with the expectation that the pseudo fluctuation will be started, and can play the game with the goal of starting the pseudo fluctuation.

  Next, the pseudo variable seconds selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram schematically showing this pseudo variable seconds selection table 222f. The pseudo-variable seconds selection table 222f is a selection table for determining pseudo-variable fluctuation seconds (fluctuation seconds for each number of pseudo-variations selected by the pseudo-variation selection table 222e). In this pseudo-variable seconds selection table 222f, a plurality of pseudo-variable seconds are set for the reach type. For normal reach and super reach, 5000 ms, 7000 ms, 10000 ms, and 12000 ms are set in common, and the determination value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each pseudo-variable number of seconds. For special reach, 5000 ms, 7000 ms, 10000 ms, 12000 ms, and 16000 ms are set, respectively, and a determination value is assigned to each pseudo-variable number of seconds.

  Here, in the pseudo variation seconds selection table 222f, even if the maximum number of pseudo variations set in each reach is selected and the longest pseudo variation seconds are selected for all the times, the special variation seconds selection table 222f It is set so as not to exceed the fluctuation seconds of the symbol.

  This pseudo variable seconds selection table 222f is set to the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the process of S1523 of the normal effect selection process (FIG. 116, S1520) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a random counter 223t described later. Based on the updated value, the pseudo variation seconds corresponding to the number of pseudo variations is selected from the processing of S1524. Here, in the process of S1523, when the value of the random counter 223t (any one of 0 to 99) is added, if the upper limit value of the effect counter 223f is exceeded, 198 is subtracted from the added value. Updated with value. For a specific enemy, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is “190” and the value of the random counter 223t is “20”, 190 + 20 = 210, which is higher than the upper limit “198”. 210-198 = 12, and the value of the effect counter 223f is updated to 12 and set. Further, the number of pseudo fluctuation seconds is set for each number of times as many as the set number of pseudo fluctuations.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). FIG. 111 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223 in the third embodiment, a pseudo variation flag 223p, a pseudo variation count storage area 223r, a pseudo variation seconds storage area 223s, and a random counter 223t are added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. About the other composition, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  The pseudo fluctuation flag 223p is a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the pseudo fluctuation. The pseudo variation flag 223p is set to ON for the corresponding winning information, and is configured to be able to determine whether or not to perform pseudo variation at the start of variation. This pseudo variation flag 223p is set to ON when it is determined that the pseudo variation is executed by the processing of S1425 of the winning command processing (FIG. 117, S1430) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the pseudo variation flag is on by the processing of S1521 of the normal effect selection processing (FIG. 116, S1520), it is automatically set to off.

  The pseudo variation count storage area 223r is a storage area for storing the pseudo variation count. When the pseudo variation number is selected from the pseudo variation selection table 222e by the process of S1423 of the winning command process (FIG. 117, S1430) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the selected number is stored.

  The pseudo-variable seconds storage area 223s is a storage area in which pseudo-variable seconds are stored for each number of times. For example, when four times of pseudo fluctuations are selected, the fluctuation seconds of the pseudo fluctuations from the first day to the fourth time are stored.

  The random counter 223t is a counter for adding the value of the effect counter 223f to make the value of the effect counter 223f a random value. Although not shown, a value counted by an electrical random number circuit is stored in the random counter 223t.

<Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 117. In the second embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the command determination process 2 (FIG. 114, S1330) with respect to the first embodiment. It is different in point. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 114, the command determination process 2 (S1330) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S1330). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 114, S1330), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 92, S1403) is different from the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) in the first embodiment. S1430) is different from S1430 in that the process of S1410 is changed to a winning command reception process (FIG. 117, S1430). For other processes, the same process is executed.

  After the process of S1402 is executed, the variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1420). With reference to FIG. 115, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1420) will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1420). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1420), the processes from S1508 to S1509 are deleted and the normal effect selection process (FIG. 116, S1520) is added to the variation pattern selection process (S1403) in the first embodiment. Is different. About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the effect mode A is set, that is, the game state is other than the time effect period, the normal effect selection process is executed (S1520). With reference to FIG. 116, this normal effect selection process (S1520) is demonstrated. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal effect selection process (S1520).

  In the normal effect selection process (FIG. 116, S1520), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo variation flag 223p is set to ON (S1521). When it is determined that the pseudo variation flag 223p is set to OFF, that is, when it is determined that the variation is not determined to execute the pseudo variation (S1521: No), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is set. Acquired and selected and set the variation pattern from the corresponding sub variation pattern selection table 222a (S1522). Based on the type of the normal background mode set in the normal background mode storage area 223o and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, a notice effect is selected from the normal background notice selection table 222c (S1523). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1521 that the pseudo variation flag 223p is on, that is, if it is determined that the pseudo variation is to be executed (S1521: Yes), a winning command receiving process (described later) ( In the process of S1425 of FIG. 117, S1430), the pseudo variation number stored in the pseudo variation number storage area 223r is read (S1524).

  It is determined whether the read number of pseudo fluctuations is 0 (S1525). When it is determined that the read number of pseudo fluctuations is greater than 0 (S1525: No), 1 is subtracted from the read number of pseudo fluctuations and updated (S1526). The value of the random counter 223r is added to the value of the effect counter 223f and updated. In this case, when the added value exceeds 198 which is the upper limit value of the effect counter 223f, a value obtained by subtracting 198 from the value is set as an updated value.

  Since the value of the random counter 223r is updated at a high speed hundreds of times faster than the processing speed of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the counter value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. It is possible to update the value of the random counter 223r to be acquired to a different value. Therefore, the value of the effect counter 223f can be varied, and a different variation time can be selected for each pseudo variation number. Therefore, pseudo fluctuation can be performed every number of times with random fluctuation time.

  After executing the process of S1527, based on the value of the effect counter 223f updated in the process of S1527, the pseudo variable seconds is selected from the pseudo variable seconds selection table 222f, and the pseudo variable seconds storage area 233t is simulated. The pseudo fluctuation seconds are set in correspondence with the number of fluctuations (how many pseudo fluctuations are within one fluctuation) (S1528). A rotating accessory movable data scenario corresponding to the set pseudo fluctuation seconds is set corresponding to the set pseudo fluctuation (S1529).

  Here, in accordance with the determined pseudo fluctuation seconds, operation data for stopping the rotating accessory 300 at a position corresponding to the pseudo fluctuation times is set. Specifically, when the pseudo fluctuation is the second time and 7000 ms is set as the pseudo fluctuation seconds, the third design is performed after the rotating member 300 is rotated at high speed during the pseudo fluctuation of 7000 ms. In synchronization with the timing at which the middle symbol (the middle symbol is temporarily stopped) is temporarily stopped, the drive data for stopping and displaying the position where “2” of the rotating accessory 300 is directly above is displayed. Is set. In this embodiment, in order to synchronize the stop timing, the rotation start position of the rotation member 300 (which position (which number or diamond symbol is stopped directly above) and the stop position when the rotation is started) Corresponding to the pseudo fluctuation time, data of timing for starting the rotation of the rotating member 300 is set.

  Therefore, the rotation member 300 starts to rotate with a delay of a set time after the timing at which the rotation starts starts to change the third symbol. In S1529, this delay time is set.

  Thereafter, the process returns to S1521, and it is determined whether the number of pseudo fluctuations updated in S1526 is 0, and the processes of S1526 to S1529 are repeated until it is determined that the number is 0. Thereby, for all the set pseudo fluctuation times, the pseudo fluctuation seconds and the operation data of the rotating member 300 corresponding to the pseudo fluctuation seconds are set. If it is determined that the number of pseudo fluctuations is 0 (S1525: Yes), this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 117, when it is determined that the winning command is received in the processing of S1409 in the command determination processing 2 (FIG. 114, S1330) in the second embodiment (S1409: Yes). The winning command reception process (S1430) will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command reception process (S1430).

  In the winning command reception process (FIG. 117, S1430), first, is the received winning command a winning command indicating that a winning in which a variation pattern of the reach type (normal reach, super reach, special reach) is selected has occurred? It is determined (S1421). When it is determined that the received winning command is a winning command indicating the reach type (S1421: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1422). Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the determination result of the received winning command, and the reach type, a lottery for pseudo variation is executed from the pseudo variation selection table 222e (S1423). Here, when the effect counter 223f in which the number of pseudo fluctuations is set is acquired, the corresponding number of pseudo fluctuations is stored in the pseudo fluctuation number storage area 223r.

  It is determined whether or not the lottery result in S1424 has a pseudo variation, that is, whether or not the pseudo variation number is set in the pseudo variation number storage area 223r (S1424). If it is determined that there is no pseudo fluctuation (S1424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a pseudo variation (S1424: Yes), the pseudo variation flag 223p corresponding to the corresponding winning information storage area 223a is set to ON (S1425). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 128. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the game is a jackpot change, the jackpot change and the subsequent effect during the jackpot game are used in the case of the jackpot change. The point of difference is that it is configured to be displayed on the display device 81 and the point that the effect of repeatedly striking the frame button 22 while the special symbol is changing is added. In addition, about the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, a battle effect in the third embodiment will be described. The battle effect in the third embodiment is a character (a hero and an enemy) with a variation pattern of a special symbol whose success / failure determination result is a jackpot and a jackpot game display displayed in a jackpot gaming machine period executed after the variation mode. Are displayed, and the type of jackpot that is drawn by the result of winning or losing is notified.

  FIG. 118 is a time chart showing the structure of the variation time of the battle effect display mode in the third embodiment. FIG. 118 shows an example of a case where the result of determining whether or not a special symbol is successful is hit and it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed after the display of fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, the variation time of the special symbol that is a big hit is set as the first half period of the battle effect. In this first half period, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect that the hero and the enemy face each other and which attacks first. In this case, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing. After that, the reduced third symbol is displayed in a combination of gills indicating a jackpot. In the third embodiment, the jackpot type is not reported depending on the number type of the third symbol. With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B when the jackpot is won, so whether the jackpot A or jackpot depends on the outcome of the battle performance. It is the structure which alert | reports whether it is B. If the main character wins, the player can recognize that the jackpot is A, and if the enemy wins, the player can recognize that the jackpot is B.

  In the jackpot game period shown in FIG. 118, the display form of the latter half of the battle effect as shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed. In the latter half of the battle production, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), an example in which a display mode in which the main character obtains an attack right and performs an attack is displayed, and an enemy obtains an attack right and performs an attack as shown in FIG. An example in which a display mode to be started is displayed is set.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), in the example where the hero attacks, if the enemy can be defeated by attacking the hero, the jackpot type is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). If you defeat it, you will see the text “Promote!” On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 120, in the example where the enemy attacks, if the hero is attacked by the enemy, the type of jackpot is a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) if the hero prevents the enemy from attacking and defeats. The text “Promote promotion if attack can be prevented!” Is displayed.

  In this way, since the player may be notified that the main character or the enemy gains the right to attack is a jackpot A, the player can play the game state after the jackpot game with a high probability gaming state ( A game can be played with the expectation that it will be set to (probable).

  Here, when the gaming state is set to the high probability gaming state, until the next big hit, the high probability gaming state is maintained. Will be natural. The player's interest is directed to whether the next jackpot and jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) or jackpot B (16R normal jackpot). As a player, the game is performed with the expectation that a high probability gaming state (probability change) will be continuously given after the next jackpot by determining the jackpot A.

  In this embodiment, when a high-probability gaming state is given, a combination of the special symbol variation period in which the success / failure determination result is a jackpot and the time of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter is combined into one effect (battle). Since it is configured to display the jackpot A or jackpot B on the third symbol display device 81 as a production), the time required for the production can be set longer, and the contents of the production are more diverse. Can be.

  Further, in the conventional configuration, a jackpot notification is given during a special symbol variation period, and then a notification effect of whether the jackpot is A or a jackpot B is performed during the jackpot game. In this configuration, if the player is in a probabilistic gaming state, in the special symbol variation, the interest in the jackpot notification is weak because the interest is low, and the variation period of the special symbol becomes boring. There was a problem. However, in the present embodiment, since the special symbol variation period and the jackpot game period are combined with the jackpot A or the jackpot B, a notification effect (battle effect) is executed. It is possible to suppress boring defects.

  Next, a button effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The button effect is a kind of special symbol variation pattern, and is an effect in which the effect display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by pressing the frame button 22. As shown in FIG. 121 (a), a display mode that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 is displayed during the variation display of the third symbol. A remaining time indicator M indicating the remaining time during which the frame button 22 can be pressed is displayed below the symbol simulating the shape of the frame button 22. The display color of the remaining time indicator M is variable based on the decrease in the remaining time. In the present embodiment, the remaining time period is set to a red display color, and when the remaining time is reduced, the amount is changed to white (the portion displayed in red is reduced) and displayed variably ( (See FIG. 121 (b)).

  Further, on the left side of the remaining time indicator M, “long-pressed auto-strike” indicates that, by long-pressing the frame button 22, it is controlled (determined) to be in the same state as that of continuous-stroke. Characters are displayed. In the upper part of the display area, an indicator whose color is changed based on repeated hitting of the frame button 22 is displayed. A scale is displayed on this indicator, and the degree of expectation that the determination result of the special symbol whose scale is changing is a win is set. When the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit and the indicator is displayed with a variable color (variable from white to red) until the indicator scale is larger, the player is not successful in determining whether the special symbol is changing. I can expect that.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (the frame button 22 is pressed continuously for 3 seconds or 1 second), the long press is detected on the pattern imitating the frame button 22. Then, “automatic hitting” is displayed indicating that the state is set to the state where the automatic hitting is automatically performed. In the present embodiment, the pressing period of the frame button 22 that is determined to be a long press is variably set according to the remaining time that the operation of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid. Specifically, when the remaining time is 5 seconds or less, when the frame button 22 has been pressed continuously for 3 seconds until then, the setting that has been determined to be a long press is the frame button 22 continuously for 1 second. Switching is set so that a long press is determined when is pressed. As a result, even if the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time after the remaining time is short, more indicators can be stored and button effects can be enjoyed.

  In the present embodiment, the determination time for determining that the frame button 22 has been pressed for a long time is changed according to the remaining time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of change of the indicator is increased or the speed of change is increased. You may make it do. In addition, when the remaining time reaches a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds or less) or the like, when the frame button 22 is operated, the maximum value or the predetermined value (for example, the scale MAX) that is the value by which the indicator can be changed. If an effect to be displayed is selected, the indicator may be varied and displayed up to the scale 1).

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 123. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223. Is different. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 122A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the ROM 222 in the third embodiment, a fusion effect selection table 222g and a fusion variation pattern selection table 222h are added to the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The fusion effect selection table 222g is a selection table for selecting a round display mode that is a big hit. FIG. 123 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fusion effect selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), a plurality of round display modes are set for each jackpot type. If the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), the round display mode set in the display mode that the hero will eventually win is set, if the jackpot B (16R normal jackpot), the hero is final The round display mode set in the display mode of defeating is set.

  Also, in the fusion effect selection table 222f, a round display mode is set for each of the special symbol variation patterns informing the jackpot executed before the jackpot game is started. Thereby, since the round display mode corresponding to the variation content of the special symbol can be selected, it is configured so that the effect can be matched. A plurality of round display modes are set for the contents of the variation pattern of each previous variation, and the value of the effect counter 223f is assigned to each of them. Specifically, it will be described when the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g for selecting a variation pattern of a battle effect (fusion effect) of a special symbol described later is selected.

  The fusion variation pattern selection table 222g is a selection table for selecting a variation pattern of a special design battle effect. FIG. 123 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the battle effect is set to be selected when the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. A variation pattern of battle effects is set for each jackpot type. The determination value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is assigned to each battle effect.

  Specifically, the enemy attack start variation patterns A and B are battle effects in which the enemy makes an attack. These enemy attack start variation patterns A and B correspond to the type of normal reach, and are selected when a variation pattern command indicating normal reach is output from the main controller 110. The main character attack start variation patterns A and B are battle effects in which the main character makes an attack. The main character attack start variation patterns A and B are variation patterns corresponding to the type of super reach, and are selected when a variation pattern command indicating super reach is received from the main controller 110. The simultaneous attack start variation patterns A and B are battle effects in which the main character and the enemy simultaneously attack. The simultaneous attack start variation patterns A and B are variation patterns corresponding to the type of special reach, and are selected when a variation pattern command indicating special reach is received from the main controller 110.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the type of variation pattern selected from the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g, the round display mode that is a big hit is selected from the fusion effect selection table 222f described above. As shown in FIG. 123 (a), when either of the enemy attack start variation patterns A and B is selected, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the reverse effect is based on the value of the effect counter 223f. Either A or B is selected. In this round effect, a round effect is displayed in which the hero wins the enemy attack. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B, one of the enemy victory effects A and B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In the enemy victory effects A and B, a round effect in which the hero wins the enemy is displayed.

  If either of the main character attack start variation patterns A and B is selected, if the big hit is A, either of the normal victory effects A and B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In the normal victory effects A and B, a round effect is displayed in which the main character attacks and then defeats the enemy. On the other hand, if the jackpot is B, one of the main character losing effects A and B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In the main character losing effects A and B, a round display mode indicating that the enemy cannot be defeated even if the main character makes an attack is displayed.

  When one of the simultaneous attack start variation patterns A and B is selected, if the jackpot is A, either the main character attack victory effect A or the enemy attack reverse victory effect B is displayed in the effect counter 223f. In the simultaneous attack start variation patterns A and B, the hero and the enemy are attacking each other at the same time, so the hero finally wins the attack with the main character gaining the right to attack and the enemy finally has the right to attack. The enemy attack reversal victory effect B in which the main character endures and wins the attack is displayed. On the other hand, if it is a big hit B, the enemy attack victory effect A or the hero attack reverse loss effect B is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223f. In the enemy attack victory effect A, a round effect in which the enemy finally obtains the right to attack and wins is displayed. In the main character attack reversal losing effect B, a round effect in which the main character finally obtains the right to attack but the enemy loses the attack and the main character loses is displayed.

  Thus, since the story is selected so that the variation pattern of the special symbol and the round effect displayed after that are connected, the player can enjoy the effect of the variation pattern and the round effect as a series of effects. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the connection between the display mode by the special symbol variation pattern and the round effect is connected by displaying a black screen (blacking out the screen). You may comprise so that it may select. By comprising in this way, the change display mode (variation pattern) of a special symbol and the display mode of a round effect can be displayed with a connected display effect.

  FIG. 122B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In the RAM 223 in the third embodiment, a fusion effect flag 223u, a SW valid time storage area 223v, and a SW press counter 223w are added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The fusion effect flag 223u is a flag indicating that a variation pattern has been selected from the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g. Based on the fact that the battle effect variation pattern has been selected from the fusion variation pattern selection table 222g, the fusion effect flag 223u is turned on. A process of selecting a round display mode is executed from 222f.

  The SW effective time storage area 223v is a storage area for storing an effective time for determining that the operation is effective when the frame button 22 is operated. In the SW effective time storage area 223v, the effective time corresponding to the variation pattern is set based on the selection of the variation pattern in which the SW effect shown in FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (b) is performed.

  The SW press counter 223w determines the time during which the frame button 22 is pressed. Even when the frame button 22 is continuously hit, the SW press counter 223w is updated by addition, so that it is also a counter that counts the period of hitting continuously.

<Control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 129, a control process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the control process in the third embodiment, the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the command determination process 3 (FIG. 125, S1340), compared to the first embodiment. has been changed. About the other process, since the same process as 1st Embodiment is performed, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 124, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1004).

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 124, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the jackpot start (S1101). When it is determined that it is the timing of the big hit (S1101: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the big hit by the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S1102). If it is determined that it is not the big hit start timing (S1103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether the game is a jackpot game (S1103). If it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing for starting a new round (S1104). If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1104: Yes), a process of releasing either the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S1105). Set a round number command to indicate the number of rounds to start anew. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened when a big hit is made in the normal gaming state, and the second variable winning device 650 is opened when a big win is made in the high probability gaming state. Is done.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), the condition for closing the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 being opened (10 balls won or 30 seconds) Whether or not has been established) (S1107). If it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied, a process of closing the opened first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S1108). On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition for closing is not satisfied (S1107: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the command determination process 3 (S1340) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S1340). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 125, S1340) in the third embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) in the first embodiment in that the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 92, S1403) is a variation pattern selection process. 3 (S1440), and each process from S1412 to S1413 is added. About the other process, since the same process as 1st Embodiment is performed, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The variation pattern selection processing 3 (S1440) is that the processing of S1508 to S1509 of the variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 92, S1403) in the first embodiment is changed to the normal effect selection processing 2 (FIG. 126, S1530). This is different from the first embodiment. Since the same processing is executed for the other processing, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the normal effect selection process 2 (S1530) which is a process in the variation pattern selection process 3 (S1440) in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal effect selection process 2 (S1530). This normal effect selection process 2 (S1530) is executed when it is determined in the process of S1507 (see FIG. 92) that the effect mode A is set (other than the time effect period) (S1507: Yes). It is processing.

  In the normal effect selection process 2 (FIG. 126, S1530), first, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (S1531). If it is determined that the determination result is not correct (S1531: No), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired, and the corresponding variation pattern is sub-variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to normal background (see FIG. 71). ) Is selected (S1532). Based on the selected normal background mode type and the value of the effect counter 223f, a notice effect is selected and set from the normal background notice selection table 222c (see FIG. 74A) (S1533). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1531 that the result of the determination is a big hit (S1531: Yes), the value of the variation mode selection counter 223h is acquired, and the variation pattern corresponding to that value is selected as the variation variation pattern selection. A selection is made from the table 222g (see FIG. 123B) (S1534). The fusion effect flag 223u is set to ON (S1535). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern only for the battle effect whose winning / failing determination result is a big hit is selected. Thereby, the player can discriminate | determine that it was big hit by the battle production being started. And since the jackpot type is notified by the content of the battle effect, it is possible to concentrate on the notification of the jackpot type and play the game.

  Returning to FIG. 125, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S1409 that a winning command has not been received (S1409: No), it is determined whether a jackpot game command has been received (S1412). Here, the jackpot game command corresponds to an opening command and a round number command. If it is determined that a jackpot game command has been received (S1412: Yes), a jackpot effect process is executed (S1413). This jackpot effect process (S1413) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot effect process (S1413). Settings such as a round display mode to be displayed during the jackpot are executed.

  In the jackpot effect process (FIG. 127, S1413), first, it is determined whether or not the fusion effect flag 223u is on (S1541). When it is determined that the fusion effect flag 223u is off, that is, it is determined that the battle effect variation pattern has not been selected and won (S1541: No), the round display mode is displayed based on the received command. A display command for instructing is set (S1542).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fusion effect flag 223u is on (S1541: Yes), the fusion effect process is executed (S1544). This fusion effect process (S1544) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the fusion jackpot presentation process (S1544). In the jackpot presentation process (FIG. 128, S1544), first, it is determined whether the received command is an opening command (S1551). If it is determined that the received command is an opening command, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S1552). Based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223f and the jackpot type, a round display mode (battle effect) is selected from the fusion effect selection table 222f (FIG. 123 (a)) (S1553).

  The opening round display mode set in the selected round display mode is set, and the corresponding display command is set (S1554). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is not an opening command (S1551: No), the received command is a round number command, and therefore corresponds to the number of rounds indicated by the round number command from the selected round display mode. The displayed round display mode is set, and a display command corresponding to the round display mode is set (S1556). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In this way, since the display modes corresponding to the rounds are displayed in order, the display can be performed in accordance with the progress of the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1307), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 90) of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (FIG. 129, S1307), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time is a value greater than zero. If it is determined that the SW valid time is 0, the value of the SW valid time storage area 223v is reset (S1732). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effective time is greater than 0 (S1731: Yes), the SW effective time is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (S1733). It is determined whether the SW effective time is 5 seconds or less (S1734). If it is determined that the SW valid time is 5 seconds or less (S1734: Yes), the long press determination value is set to 1 second (S1735). On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW valid time is not 5 seconds or less (S1734: No), the long press determination value is set to 3 seconds (S1736).

  In the process of S1737, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1737). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1737: Yes), the value of the SW press counter 223w is incremented by one. It is determined whether or not the value of the SW press counter 223w is equal to or greater than the long press determination value set in the processing of S1735 or S1736 (S1740). If it is determined that the value is equal to or longer than the long press determination value (S1740: Yes), the SW indicator is incremented by 1 within the range of the effect value set in the variation pattern (S1741). A display command for displaying the updated SW indicator is set (S1742). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1740 that the SW press counter 223w is equal to or less than the long press determination value (S1740: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1737 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1737: No), the period during which the frame button 22 has not been pressed is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds). It is determined whether or not this is the case (S1743). If it is determined that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (S1743: Yes), the SW pressing counter is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1739). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is less than the predetermined time (S1743: No), this process ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, if the frame button 22 is pressed within 0.5 seconds after it is pressed, the value of the SW press counter 223w is incremented by 1 and updated, assuming that it is continuously hit. And when it becomes more than a long press determination value, it sets so that SW indicator may be varied. Note that the amount by which the SW indicator varies is set in advance for each variation pattern, and is set so as to represent the expected degree of the determination result.

  Therefore, the player can change the indicator even if the player presses the button for a long time or makes repeated hits. Furthermore, since the long press determination value is variably set according to the SW effective time, even if the SW effective time is reduced, it is possible to show the player the effect of changing the indicator. Note that the speed at which the indicator is varied may be set faster depending on the value of the SW valid time.

  In the present embodiment, the first half effect of the battle effect is displayed in the jackpot variation, and the second half effect of the battle effect is displayed in the subsequent jackpot game. By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol variation time is configured to be short, it is possible to sufficiently set the effect time of the battle effect, to provide the player with a time-efficient game, and to further enhance the game A gaming machine with improved performance can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, in the first half of the battle production executed with the big hit fluctuation, the production of the main character or the enemy can take the right to attack, and in the subsequent big hit production, the main character attacks. In this case, if the enemy can be defeated, the type of jackpot is indicated to be a jackpot A (probability change), and if it cannot be defeated, the jackpot B (ordinary jackpot) is notified. Further, when the enemy attacks, if the attack from the enemy can be prevented, the jackpot A is notified, and if the attack is not prevented, the jackpot B is notified.

  In addition, in this embodiment, it was set as the structure which each selects the variation pattern (battle production) of special symbols, and the round display mode of jackpot game, but it is not restricted to this, The variation of special symbols is based on the success determination result of jackpot When selecting a pattern, it may be configured to calculate an effect time including the time of a jackpot game to be executed thereafter, and select a battle effect corresponding to the effect time. By comprising in this way, the frequency | count of selecting a battle production can be reduced and control can be performed easily.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fourth Embodiment>
A pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 133. In this embodiment, the battle effect described in the third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that the damage given to the enemy is varied by the history of the technique in which the main character attacks the enemy.

  In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of types of enemies are set, and the hero can attack each enemy by defeating the enemy (head sword, sword attack, etc.) and the defeated enemy Is stored as a history. When a technique that remains in the history is executed against the same enemy, the damage to the enemy is increased. Therefore, the player can feel as the protagonist grows up and can enjoy it without getting tired even if the skill that has been played once is selected again.

  In the present embodiment, the history of the technique is configured to be stored. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the attacked location (enemy head, torso, foot, etc.) is stored, and the attack location stored in the history is stored. May be configured to be a weak point of the enemy. With this configuration, even when the number of effects is not large and the same effect is selected, the player can enjoy the effects without getting tired.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 131, the battle effects displayed during the variation of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the jackpot game in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 (a) shows a display form of a battle effect displayed as an effect display mode (variation pattern) when the special symbol (the third symbol) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. It is the figure which showed an example. In the present embodiment, the player is informed that the player is a big hit by displaying a display mode in which the enemy can be met. In this case, the 3rd symbol displayed in a reduced scale is stopped and displayed at the “777” level indicating that it is a big hit.

  In the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the history of enemies who have defeated the battle and the techniques defeated at that time are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. Thereby, the player can recognize that it is an enemy who has been defeated once when a battle effect for fighting the same enemy is displayed next time. You can also recognize the number of enemies you have defeated.

  In this embodiment, when an enemy is defeated, the technique of defeating the enemy is set as the weak point of the enemy from the next time. In terms of control, when the technique that is the weak point is selected and displayed, the indicator indicated by the life point (HP) indicating the remaining physical strength of the enemy is set to be reduced by a factor of two. As a result, even if the battle effect is displayed and the enemy who has fought once is selected and displayed, the player can play the game with the expectation that the hero will perform the technique that is the enemy's weakness. It is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored by being an enemy. Therefore, even if the number of enemies is set small, the same enemy can be reused.

  FIG. 130 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the main character defeats an enemy horn beast by an attack using a sword during a jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the effect that the main character wins the enemy is displayed during the jackpot round so that the jackpot type is a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). Also, in the area where the history at the upper left of the display area is displayed, “Ken Beast” indicating the type of enemy is displayed, and “Sword” indicating the type of technique defeated is displayed below it. Yes.

  FIG. 131 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the hero defeats a horned beast by head-butting. In this case, a “horn beast” indicating the type of enemy is displayed at the upper left corner where the history of the display area is displayed, and a “head butt” indicating a defeated technique is displayed below it. Further, FIG. 130 (c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the hero defeats the enemy beast by kicking. Also in this case, the characters “kick” indicating the type of the defeated technique are displayed below the “horn beast” which is the type of the defeated enemy in the upper left of the display area. Since the current history is displayed in addition to the previous history as in the display modes shown in FIGS. 130B to 131B, the player can easily recognize the history so far.

  In the present embodiment, the type of enemy, the type of technique to be displayed, etc. are determined in advance (set by the variation pattern) depending on the type of variation pattern to be selected. The player may select the enemy type by operating the frame button 22 or may select the type of technique from the list when attacking. By configuring in this way, the player recognizes an enemy that has been defeated once as an easily defeated enemy, and again chooses the same enemy to play or plays with the goal of defeating all enemies. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game. In addition, when a technique can be selected, a game can be performed in anticipation of whether a technique that is a weak point of the opponent is included, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the configuration where the technique can be selected, when the result of the determination is correct, the technique that makes the enemy's weak point easier to be included in the list than when the result is not certain, the player can be given a certain effect. It is possible to play games in connection with expectations.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, an electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described. The electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the contents of the RAM 223 are changed. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. The ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment in that the contents of the sub variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal background mode are changed and a jackpot effect selection table 222h is added.

  In the sub variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal background mode in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a battle effect display manner as shown in FIG. 130 (a). has been changed. Here, when the determination result is a jackpot, special symbols are gathered together and a display mode for meeting an enemy is displayed. A player can recognize that it is a big hit by meeting an enemy and can determine that a battle effect is started.

  The jackpot effect selection table 222h is a selection table for selecting a battle effect displayed in each round effect in the jackpot game. Here, the display modes of various battle effects as shown in FIGS. 130 (b) to 131 (b) are set to be selected based on the current number of rounds, the effect counter, and the jackpot type. . When the jackpot type is jackpot A, as shown in FIGS. 130 (b) to 131 (b), an effect in which the main character wins is finally selected. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, illustration is omitted, but an effect that the main character loses to the enemy is finally set to be selected. In other words, all the battle effects selected when the number of rounds (15R in the present embodiment) for which win / loss is always determined are set to the battle effect modes for which win / loss is determined. When the enemy's life point is 0 due to the battle effect, if the jackpot A is determined in the round, a display mode in which the hero wins is set, and if the jackpot is B, the enemy runs away. The display mode is set to be displayed. In addition, when the life point of the main character is 0 in the round before the 15th round, if the determined jackpot type is jackpot A, the main character is revived and the life point is increased to the maximum value. When the effect display mode is displayed and the jackpot is B, the display mode in which the main character is defeated is displayed.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment, a history storage area 223x and a life point storage area 223y are added to the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment.

  The history storage area 223x is a storage area in which information on the defeated enemy and information on the technique that defeated the enemy are stored in order corresponding to each other in the battle effect. The history storage area 223x is initialized when the power is turned off, and is reset to an initial value (there is no history).

  The life point storage area 223y is a storage area for storing values corresponding to the main character and enemy life points, respectively. The hero's life point is set in advance at the start of the battle. Also, the enemy life point is set with a unique value based on the enemy type at the start of the battle.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fourth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 133, the control processing in the fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) is changed to the command determination process 4 (not shown) with respect to the first embodiment. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Without the command determination process 4 (illustrated) in the fourth embodiment, the command determination process 3 (FIG. 125, S1340) in the third embodiment is different from the command determination process (FIG. 91, S1311) in the first embodiment. The process of S1412 is different from the first embodiment in that a process of changing the jackpot presentation process (S1413) to the jackpot presentation process 2 (FIG. 133, S1460) is added. About other processing, since the same processing as a 1st embodiment is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, about the jackpot effect process 2 (S1460) which is one process in the command determination process 4 (not shown) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 in this 4th Embodiment. explain. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot presentation process 2 (S1460).

  In the jackpot presentation process 2 (FIG. 133, S1460), first, it is determined whether the received command is an opening command (S1561). When it is determined that the received command is an opening command (S1561: Yes), the effect history is read from the history storage area 223x, and the enemy's weak point is set (S1562). The value of the effect counter 223f is acquired, and the jackpot effect pattern (the display mode of the battle effect) is determined based on the number of rounds acquired from the jackpot effect selection table 222h, the value of the acquired effect counter, and the determined jackpot type. (S1563). Display commands corresponding to the jackpot effect pattern determined in the process of S1563 and the effect history read in S1562 are set (S1564).

  Thus, when the opening command at the time of jackpot start is received, the history in the battle effect so far is read and the history is notified to the display control device 113 by the command. Therefore, the display control device 113 can determine the history information and display a display mode for notifying the history on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, this process is terminated. When the opening command is received, the battle effect corresponding to the start time is selected from the jackpot effect selection table 222h as the 1R round effect. It is possible to perform a certain battle production. Here, for example, in the case of a battle with a story, in the 1R, the direction of both of them is scrutinizing and which one is going to attack, and in the 2R to 4R, the direction of the first attack is performed. In the 5th to 7th eyes, an effect is made as to whether the opponent who is attacked can withstand the attack. Meanwhile, when the enemy's life point becomes 0, if the jackpot type is determined to be a jackpot A, a display mode in which the hero wins is displayed, and if it is a jackpot B, a display mode in which the enemy runs away is displayed. The battle effect ends. Then, as the effect of the big hit round, a normal round effect in which a character or the like is displayed is executed. In this way, the flow of battle effects is set for each round, and the effect that the player can win the hero is sure to be finally set by the effect that the victory or defeat is decided at the 15th round. , You can watch while having fun. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, it is easier to select an effect for the main character to attack or to withstand an attack from the enemy (life points are not reduced) than when the jackpot is B It is configured to be easy. Thereby, the player can predict whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A by the performance in the middle of 15R of the jackpot game, and can more enjoy the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1561 that the received command is not a jackpot command (S1561: No), the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired, and based on the acquired value, jackpot type, and number of rounds, A battle effect to be displayed in the next round is selected (determined) from the jackpot effect selection table 222h (S1565).

  It is determined whether the selected effect content is an attack set as an enemy weak point in the process of S1562 (S1566). If it is determined that the attack is set at the enemy's weak point (S1566: Yes), the life point storage area 223y is obtained by subtracting the enemy's life point by a factor of 2 based on the determined effect. (S1567). On the other hand, in the process of S1566, when it is determined that the selected content is not an attack on the enemy's weak point, the enemy life point is set to be subtracted by a factor of 1 based on the determined content. (S1568). Here, when the enemy is attacked, the life point is subtracted and set in the life point storage area 223y. However, when the enemy attacks the hero, the hero's life point is subtracted. Is done.

  It is determined whether the enemy's life point is greater than 0 (S1569). If it is determined that the enemy's life point is 0 or less (S1569: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type determined this time is a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) (S1570). When it is determined that the determined jackpot type is jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) (S1570: Yes), a display command indicating the content of the winning effect is set (S1571). When the display control device 113 receives this command, the display command indicating the contents of the winning effect as shown in FIGS. 130 (b) to 131 (b) is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1571). The technique of defeating the enemy is set as the enemy's weak point, and stored in the history storage area 223x corresponding to the winning enemy (S1572). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1570 that the jackpot type is jackpot B (16R normal jackpot) (S1570: No), a display command indicating the display mode in which the enemy has escaped is set (S1573). The player can recognize that the jackpot type is jackpot B when the display mode in which the enemy has escaped is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1569, when it is determined that the enemy life point has a value greater than 0 (S1569: Yes), it is determined whether the hero's life point has a value greater than 0 (S1574). When it is determined that the life point of the main character is 0 or less (S1574: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A (S1575). If it is determined that the jackpot type is a probable change (S1575: Yes), a display command indicating the contents of the effect that the player is revived and revived is set (S1576). Here, the life point of the hero is also updated to the maximum value and set in the life point storage area 223y.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1575, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot B (S1575: No), a display command that instructs the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode indicating the hero's defeat. Is set (S1577). Further, in the process of S1574, when it is determined that the life point of the hero is a value greater than 0 (S1574: Yes), this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the life point is increased or decreased by the effect determined for each round and the life point becomes 0, the player switches the effect to display based on the determined jackpot type. Thus, the player can feel as if the jackpot type is determined by the result of the battle.

<About the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135. FIG. 134 (a) shows a state before the combined operation unit operates. On the third symbol display device 81, four lines of diagonal and center lines are displayed in a reach state. Here, as shown in FIG. 134 (b), the combined operation unit rotates toward the display area side of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol (four symbols) displayed on the left, right, top and bottom respectively. 2 patterns).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135, when the combined operation unit is changed to a position that does not hide the left, right, top and bottom symbols, the symbol is changed from the normal symbol (4 symbols, 2 symbols) to the probable symbol (1 symbol, 7 symbols). Displayed. As described above, when the combined operation unit operates, the type of the 3rd symbol is changed to a symbol advantageous to the player, so that the player can play the game in the expectation that the combined operation unit will operate. Can do.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, the control device is divided into the main control device, the sound lamp control device, the display control device, and the like, but may be configured as a single control device.

  A part or all of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

  A moving member formed to be movable between the first position and the second position, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means for the moving member A transmission means for transmitting to the transmission member, wherein the transmission means transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and transmits the driving force from the driving means to the moving member. When the movement of at least the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed. A gaming machine A1 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the movement member at the first position starts to move to the second position, the transmission state is formed after the transmission unit forms the blocking state. The driving force required for the driving means to start the movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the driving means can be reduced in size.

  That is, when movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the stationary object is moved, so that a force exceeding the inertial force generated at the moving member at the start of movement is applied. It is necessary to act on such a moving member, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. As a result, the driving means has been increased in size (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the inertial action to maintain the moving state of the moving member acts, so that the driving force required for the driving means does not move the moving member. It becomes smaller compared to the driving force required at the start. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it can be said that the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is in use.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the transmission unit forms the shut-off state. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. In other words, since the transmission unit first forms the shut-off state, it is possible to generate a driving force in the driving unit in a no-load state, and it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving unit. . Thereafter, a transmission state is formed by the transmission means (switched from the shut-off state to the transmission state), so that the driving means is in a state where the driving state is momentum (a state where the inertial force is large) and the driving force is applied to the moving means. Can be transmitted. Thereby, even if a drive means is reduced in size, the movement of a moving member can be started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress a state in which the driving unit having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used.

  In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed such that teeth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the driving means side member can be engaged with the driving means side member. A moving member side member having teeth for transmitting a driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member at least partly or entirely around the driving member side member or at least one of the moving member side member. One of the gaming machines A2 is provided with a non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed and cannot be engaged with the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the transmission means is formed so that the driving means side member and the moving member side member can be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the transmission means side The moving member side member engaged with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member through the rotation of the moving member side member (a transmission state is formed). In this case, since one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is formed with a non-formed portion where teeth are not formed, the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the driving means side When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are incapable of meshing, and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is cut off. (Blocking state is formed).

  Therefore, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the drive means side member can be idled by forming a shut-off state using the non-forming portion first. Therefore, the driving means can be driven in a no-load state, and the driving state of the driving means can be given force (inertial force on the driving means side member). Thereafter, the driving means side member that idles is engaged with the moving member side member (that is, a transmission state is formed), so that the driving means starts driving the moving means in a state in which the driving state is energized. be able to. Thereby, even if a drive means is reduced in size, the movement of a moving member can be started.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the transmission means includes the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and the at least one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided. Since the non-forming part where the teeth are not formed is provided, the shut-off state and the transmission state according to the relative rotation position (rotation position of the non-forming part) between the driving means side member and the moving member side member And can be switched. In other words, since the configuration for achieving the switching of the state does not require an actuator device and can be configured only from gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, the teeth formed on the driving means side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for transmission of power through meshing with the mating teeth. In this case, the shape of the teeth is not limited. For example, the gear teeth exemplified below can be applied to the teeth of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. Examples of the gear include a spur gear, a helical gear, a helical gear, a bevel gear, a spiral bevel gear, a screw gear, a crown gear, a miter gear, an internal gear, a hypoid gear, and a worm gear. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

  In the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming part, and the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member face each other, A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a blocking state is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes a non-forming part, and the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member Since the formation portions face each other, a blocking state is formed, so that the outer diameters of the non-formation portions of the drive means side member and the movement member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the drive means side member and the movement member side member is secured. Improvements can be made.

  That is, when only one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member has a non-forming portion (that is, the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is formed with teeth around the entire circumference). The non-forming portion needs to be retracted to a position where the engagement with the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-forming portion needs to be retracted to the rotating shaft side from the valley bottom in one tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. As a result, the retraction amount in the non-forming portion increases, so the outer diameter in one non-forming portion of the driving means side member or the moving member side member decreases, and accordingly, one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member This leads to a decrease in rigidity.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, since each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming portion, both the non-forming portions retreat to a position where they do not interfere with the opposing non-forming portions. If it is, it is enough. Specifically, both non-forming portions can be positioned between the valley bottom and the mountain top of the teeth of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to move backward from the valley bottom to the rotating shaft side. As a result, the amount of retraction in the non-forming portion can be reduced, so that the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member can Improvements can be made.

  In the gaming machine A3, the non-formation portion in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is curved and formed in an arc shape around the one rotation axis of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. The non-formation part in the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is separated from the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction, and the driving means side member or the moving member side member A gaming machine A4, characterized in that it has a shape projecting toward a non-forming portion in one of the above.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the non-forming part provided in each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is the non-forming part in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. The drive means side member or the moving member side member is formed in an arcuate shape around the one rotation axis, and the non-formation portion in the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is the driving means side member or the movement A shape that protrudes toward a non-forming portion formed on one of the driving member side member or the moving member side member as it is separated from the other tooth of the member side member in the circumferential direction (that is, the driving means side member or the moving member side member) Therefore, it is possible to form a cut-off state while avoiding interference between these non-forming portions, while allowing the drive means side member or moving member to be formed. By increasing the outside diameter of the other non-formation portion of the member, the other of the rigid drive means side member or the moving member side member can be further enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are respectively at the first phase position and the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-formed part of the side member and the non-formed part of the moving member side member face each other to form the blocking state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member form a blocking state at two locations, the first phase position and the second phase position. Since the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started. When the movement of the moving member at the second position to the first position is started, the transmission state is formed after the shut-off state is formed, so that the driving state of the driving means is achieved. Momentum (inertial force) can be given. That is, even when the driving force that can be generated by the driving means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started both when the moving member is in the first position and when it is in the second position.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmission means transmits a driving force of the driving means to the second moving member, and the driving means A gaming machine B1 that can simultaneously form a blocking state in which transmission of driving force to the first moving member is blocked.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. Is done. In this case, the transmission unit can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the second moving member and a blocking state in which transmission of the driving force from the driving unit to the first moving member is blocked. Therefore, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means.

  That is, when the first moving member and the second moving member are moved by one driving means, in the conventional product, the driving means has two driving states: a state in which the driving means generates a driving force and a state in which the generation of the driving force is stopped. Since the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched by forming the first moving member and the second moving member, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or only the operation mode in which both stop. Can be formed, and the first moving member could not be stopped while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, a driving means for moving the first moving member and a driving means for moving the second moving member are individually provided. There was a necessity (for example, refer to JP, 2011-139766, A).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means, so the first moving member and the second moving member can be achieved. It is possible to reduce the product cost by reducing the number of driving means while making it possible to achieve the effect of the movement and stop of the members.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means transmits a driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member and a driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. A second transmission member, and the first transmission member includes a first driving means side member on which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the first driving means. A first moving member-side member formed on at least a part or the entire circumference of a tooth that is formed on the side member so as to be capable of meshing with the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member; , And at least one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member is not formed with the teeth, and cannot engage with the other of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member. Characterized by having non-formed parts formed Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmitting member and transmitted to the second moving member by the second transmitting member, The first moving member and the second moving member are respectively moved.

  In this case, the first transmission member is formed such that the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member can be engaged with each other. Therefore, when the first driving member side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving member, The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member. Is moved. In addition, since one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first driving means side member is rotated. When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member are incapable of meshing, and the driving means Transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is blocked (a blocked state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocking state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Thereby, the operation | movement aspect which stops a 1st moving member, moving a 2nd moving member can be achieved by one drive means.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member is composed of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member. Since at least one of the first moving member side member is configured not to form teeth and a non-forming portion is provided, the relative rotational position between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member (of the non-forming portion) Depending on the rotation position), the blocking state and the transmission state can be switched. In other words, since the configuration for achieving the switching of the state does not require an actuator device and can be configured only from gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second transmission member receives the second transmission member from the driving unit when the transmission state in which the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. A gaming machine B3 that is capable of forming a blocking state that blocks transmission of driving force to the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member moves from the driving unit to the second moving member when a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. Since it is possible to form a shut-off state in which the transmission of the driving force is cut off, an operation mode in which the second moving member is stopped while moving the first moving member can be achieved by one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means), while moving the first moving member The operation mode for stopping the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means. Thereby, while reducing the number of drive means and reducing the product cost, the variation of the operation modes of the movement and stop of the first moving member and the second moving member can be increased, and the effect of the production can be enhanced. it can.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove portion and a pin portion formed so as to be movable along the groove portion, and the groove portion and the pin portion extend from the driving means to the second moving member. The driving force transmission path is disposed, and the pin portion is moved along the groove portion so that a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member can be formed. The gaming machine B4, wherein the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion so that a blocking state in which transmission of driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member can be formed. On the other hand, since the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a cut-off state that interrupts transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. When the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is interrupted by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is stopped), the second moving member is stopped. Is transmitted to the second moving member to move the second moving member. Rukoto can.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which a tooth to which driving force is transmitted from the driving means is formed at least partially or entirely, and the second driving means side member. Teeth that can be engaged with each other and that transmit the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member are formed on at least a part or the entire circumference, and one of the groove portion or the pin portion is arranged. A second moving member side member provided, wherein the second driving means side member is disposed coaxially with the first driving means side member of the first transmission member, and the second moving member side member Is arranged coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the second driving member side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member are the first driving member side member and the first movement of the first transmission member. Since each member side member is disposed coaxially, backlash between the second driving member side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member, the first driving member side member of the first transmission member, and Backlash between the first moving member-side members can be generated in the same direction, and thereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a shift in the production timing between the first moving member and the second moving member.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second drive means side member of the second transmission member may be fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member. According to this, since the second drive means side member of the second transmission member is fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member, to both the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member. There is no need for a member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means, but a member for transmitting to either the first driving means side member or the second driving means side member is sufficient. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, or the parts can be miniaturized to reduce the product cost.

  Here, the phrase “fixed to the first drive means side member to the first drive means side member” means that it is sufficient if the rotations of the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member are synchronized. Therefore, the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member may be formed as separate bodies and fixed to each other, or may be formed integrally. When they are formed separately, for example, as a method of fixing them, for example, bonding with an adhesive, welding with ultrasonic waves, fastening with screws, and a method of fitting a protrusion provided on one side into a recess or hole provided on the other side A method combining these is exemplified.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means is a drive means side member in which a tooth to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means is formed at least partially or all around, and the drive means side member is formed so as to be engageable with the drive means side member. A moving member side member formed with teeth that transmit a driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member at least partially or around the entire circumference, and the driving means side member and the moving member side member are When the non-forming portions are formed so that the teeth are not formed and cannot be engaged with each other, and the non-forming portions are arranged at the engaging positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side Non-forming parts Gaming machine C1 but which is characterized in being capable of abutting to form a non-formation portion of the driving means side member.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member engaged with the driving means side member is rotated, and with the rotation of the moving member side member. The moving member is moved. When the driving means side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the non-forming portions are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member Is considered impossible to mesh. As a result, transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked (a blocking state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is formed so as to be able to contact the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member contacts the non forming portion of the driving means side member. The rotation of the moving member side member in the direction of contact can be restricted. That is, the movement of the moving member can be restricted.

  In this case, the moving member is conventionally stopped as follows. That is, when a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided, and when the rotation of the driving means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotational position is detected by the sensor device, It is determined that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, and the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, when the drive amount of the drive means (for example, the number of steps when the drive means is constituted by a step motor) is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member is at the end of the movement range. The driving of the driving means is stopped (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). In this case, for example, due to a rotation position or a drive amount detection failure due to the influence of electrical noise, the drive means may not be stopped even though the moving member has reached the end of the moving range. obtain. Therefore, the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the moving member is restricted by the stopper when the driving means is not properly stopped. However, in the structure in which the movement of the moving member is regulated by the stopper in this way, when the moving member collides with the stopper, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged, but also the driving means has an excessive load. There is a possibility that the driving means may be damaged due to the action.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of its moving range, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are incapable of engaging with each other. Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is interrupted, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means continues to be generated. Therefore, damage due to the collision between the moving member and other members can be avoided. Also, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is disconnected from the driving means, and the driving means is idle, so that an excessive load acts on the driving means. Can be avoided.

In addition, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a movable member formed to be movable, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the moving member, and the moving member is moved within a predetermined movement range by the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-120640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is the ascending position and gravity is applied to the moving member disposed at the end of the moving range, the moving member is moved (lowered) by the action of gravity. It is necessary not to do. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (downward movement) of the moving member is regulated by causing the driving force of the driving means to oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is at the end of the moving range). The energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is disposed at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member-side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member. Thereby, rotation (movement of a movement member) of a movement member side member can be controlled. That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated from each other, so that the moving member cannot be held at the end using the driving force of the driving means. The moving member can be mechanically held at the end of the moving range by utilizing the contact of the non-forming portion. As a result, energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and are in contact with each other In this case, the gaming machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. In the case where they are brought into contact with each other (that is, when the moving means is disposed at the end of the moving range), the moving member side member is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation in both directions. The moving member when reaching the end of the moving range compared to the case where the side member is formed in a shape that can regulate the rotation only in one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity). The movement member can be quickly positioned at the end of the movement range, and the movement member can be stably held at the end of the movement range. The game board The external force) generated in the Ku or shake it possible to suppress the vibration and displacement.

  In the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is the driving When arranged at the meshing position of the means side member and the moving member side member, the arc is centered on the rotation axis of the driving means side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-forming portion of the driving means side member Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is formed to be curved in a slightly larger diameter arc shape.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the non-formation portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the moving member side The non-forming portion of the member has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the driving means side member when the driving means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions, and the driving means side member is not formed. Since it is formed to be curved in the shape of an arc having the same or slightly larger diameter as the arc of the part, the non-formed part of the moving member side member can be smoothly brought into contact with the non-formed part of the driving means side member, Both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the non-formed parts can be smoothly brought into contact with each other, the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range and stopped can be reduced, and the contact pressure between the non-formed parts can be reduced. The durability of the driving means side member and the moving member side member can be improved.

  Further, since the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member is not affected by the rotational position (phase) of the driving means side member. The non-forming part can be brought into contact with the non-forming part of the driving means side member, and the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be restricted. That is, even if the drive side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the rotation of the moving member side member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member is held at the end of the moving range. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear via the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member via the plurality of fastened portions, a single structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at the plurality of locations. it can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased using the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the driving means side member when the non-forming portion is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, the moving member side member secures rigidity to resist the reaction force. On the other hand, for example, when the thickness is increased, the weight is increased, and when a highly rigid material is used, the material cost is increased. According to the gaming machine C4, the rigidity of the moving member is used (that is, the movement is performed). In order to increase the rigidity of the moving member side member, it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the moving member side member or adopt a highly rigid material. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

  In the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is disposed at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member across a non-forming portion of the moving member side member. C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member moves because the fastened portion is disposed at a position facing the driving means side member across the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. When the non-forming portion of the member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member, the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the driving means side member can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both reduction in weight and cost of the moving member side member and improvement in durability of the moving member side member.

  More preferably, the fastened portion of the moving member gear is disposed at a position facing the rotation shaft of the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. The reaction force received by the moving member-side member when the non-forming portion of the moving member-side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means-side member is the rotation force of the driving means-side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member-side member. Since the portion to be fastened is disposed at a position facing the rotation axis of the driving means side member, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the driving means side member is achieved. This is because it can be further demonstrated.

  A gaming machine comprising: a moving member formed to be rotatable about a first axis between a first position and a second position; and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the moving member. A rotating member that is rotated about the second axis by a driving force transmitted from the driving means; and a pin member that is disposed on the rotating member and is eccentrically positioned with respect to the second axis. The member includes a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and formed to receive the pin member. And at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by the pin member being received in the recess.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the rotating member is rotated around the second axis by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the pin member disposed on the rotating member Is guided along the guide groove of the moving member. Since the pin member is located eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove. It is rotated around one axis.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member that rotates about the first shaft, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the moving member, and the driving force of the driving unit. There is a gaming machine in which the moving member is rotated between the first position and the second position about the first axis as a center of rotation (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, when the first position is the ascending position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member disposed at the first position from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted (that is, the moving member is held in the first position) by causing the driving force of the driving means to oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member). Therefore, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by receiving the pin member in the concave portion formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. . That is, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, and accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the pin member is received in the recess provided in the inner wall surface of the guide groove and the moving member is mechanically held at the first position, the moving member is moved to the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the guide groove portion and the rotating member can be increased as compared with the structure to be held in a mechanical manner.

  In addition, the recessed part does not need to be bottomed and may penetrate. That is, it is only necessary to have inner wall surfaces that communicate with the guide groove and face each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions described below.

  In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, And since it is arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, even when the driving force of the driving means is released, the rotation about the first axis of the moving member Since the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member in a direction parallel to the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member, depending on the pressing of the pin member accompanying the rotation of the moving member, A rotation around the second axis cannot be formed. Thereby, holding | maintenance in the 1st position of a moving member can be performed more firmly. Therefore, for example, even when the moving member is shaken by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine, the moving member can be reliably held at the first position and moved downward in the direction of gravity ( Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc shape around the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is disposed at the first position. Therefore, after the moving member is arranged at the first position, the pin member can be received in the concave portion while suppressing the posture of the moving member from fluctuating.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine D4, wherein the gaming machine D4 is recessed in the inner wall surface.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove, and the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the sliding side, the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (the rotating direction of the rotating member), and The pin member can be received in the recess and the moving member can be held in the first position.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the concave portion is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove portion, and is recessed in an inner wall surface closer to the first shaft.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove, and is recessed on the inner wall surface closer to the first axis. The concave portion can be disposed in a region that becomes a dead space between the guide groove portion and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, since the concave portion is arranged on the first shaft side in this way, the distance between the first shaft and the pin member in a state where the moving member is disposed at the first position can be further shortened. With the rotation about the first axis, the force with which the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member can be reduced. Thereby, holding | maintenance in the 1st position of a moving member can be performed more firmly.

  A movable member formed so as to be slidable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. The gaming machine further comprises a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the direction of slide movement of the moving member, and the moving member is inserted into the slide hole of the base member. The transmission means is disposed on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is disposed, and moves the driving force of the driving means. A link member that transmits to the member, and the link member is a small one of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrudes to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Gaming machine E1, characterized in that connected to the projecting portion of Kutomo 1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the link member of the transmission means is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the displacement of the link member is transmitted to the protruding portion of the moving member. Is done. Thereby, the moving member is slid by moving the protruding portion of the moving member along the slide hole.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed to be slidable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are moved. There is a gaming machine that includes a transmission unit that transmits to a member, and transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member by the transmitting unit to slide the moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-229885). . In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding movement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protrusions inserted through the slide holes. On the other hand, when the number of protrusions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing removal from the slide holes) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method for reducing the cost while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a link member that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the moving member, and the link member is opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is disposed. The base member is disposed on the other surface side of the base member and is connected to at least one projecting portion of the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member projecting to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Therefore, at least one component among the components for holding the protruding portion can also be used as the link member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions and enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, while reducing the number of parts for holding the protrusions, thereby reducing the cost.

  In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the link member and transmits a driving force transmitted from the drive means to the link member, and the base member has a connection hole formed as an opening. The drive member and the connection member of the transmission means are disposed on one surface side of the base member, and the connection member is connected to the link member through a connection hole of the base member. A gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the link member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the link member, and the connection is formed as an opening. Since the base member has a hole and the connection member is connected to the link member via the connection hole of the base member, the drive member and the connection member of the transmission means may be disposed on one surface side of the base member together with the moving member. it can. As a result, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the arrangement of the constituent members on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed). As a result, the space can be used efficiently, The overall size can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E2, the link member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, the transmission means includes a connection member disposed on one surface side of the base member and a link member disposed on the other surface side of the base member, and the connection member and the link member are connected via the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the transmission path of the driving force formed by these connection members and link members becomes long. For this reason, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted, the connecting member and the link member may be deformed and cannot be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the link member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the connecting member and the link member as a whole is increased by utilizing the rigidity of the base member. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the link member.

  In particular, in the gaming machine E3, since the link member of the connection member and the link member is rotatably supported on the base member, the base member is compared with the case where the connection member is rotatably supported on the base member. The distance from the pivot support location to the protruding portion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, stabilization of the transmission of the driving force of the drive means to the movable member can be achieved with fewer pivot support locations.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the moving member along the slide hole of the base member The game machine E4 is characterized in that is slid in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the base member. Since the moving member is slid in the vertical direction along the slide hole, the configuration in which the link member is disposed on the other surface side of the base member is effective, and the moving member can be stably slid. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is a vertical direction, the moving member is inclined forward in a direction away from one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the link member connected to the moving member and the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member is restricted not only by the parts for holding the protruding portion but also by the link member. As a result, the moving member can be slid in a stable state.

  In the gaming machine E4, the link member is connected to a projecting portion located at least above the center of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine E5, since the link member is connected to the protruding portion located at least above the center of the moving member, the link member is inclined forward in the direction away from the one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. The forward tilt posture of the moving member can be effectively regulated by the link member with respect to the moving member to be, and as a result, the moving member can be slid and moved in a more stable state.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a tooth surface meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates. And a link member having one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the moving member and rising or tilting as the rack moves in the horizontal direction. The moving member is arranged at the raised position, and the moving member is arranged at the lowered position by the tilt of the link member. At the raised position of the moving member, one end of the link member and Gaming machine F1, characterized in that the direction connecting the ends are positioned in a plane perpendicular to the respective direction of movement of the tooth surface and the rack of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is moved along with the displacement of the rack to one side in the horizontal direction. As the link member is tilted and the link member is tilted, the moving member moves downward (lowers) toward the lower position. On the other hand, if the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, The link member is erected along with the displacement to the side, and the moving member is moved upward (raised) toward the raised position as the link member is erected.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member There is a gaming machine in which the transmission means is formed by including a rack and pinion in a part of the transmission path of the driving force (see, for example, JP 2012-065923 A). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (lowering) due to the action of gravity. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted (that is, the moving member is held in the raised position) by making the driving force of the driving means oppose gravity (the weight of the moving member). ) Because of the structure, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member was increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, in the ascending position of the moving member, the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is located in a plane orthogonal to the rack tooth surface and the rack moving direction. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, generation of a force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be held in the raised position, and as a result, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the pinion and the rack of the transmission means each include a base member that is rotatably and movable, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member includes the link member. The base members are disposed to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member is interposed between the opposed surfaces of the pair of link members when the moving member is disposed at the raised position, and the pair of links. A gaming machine F2 including an interposed portion formed so as to be able to contact the opposing surface of the member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is disposed at the raised position, the gaming machine F2 is interposed between the opposed surfaces of the pair of link members and is disposed on the opposed surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member includes the interposed portion formed so as to be able to contact, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized at the raised position. In other words, in the raised position, the pair of link members are erected, so that it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the moving member is likely to be unstable. There is an interposed portion between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the facing direction (that is, the movement direction of the rack) by the interposed portion. Thereby, a pair of link member can be maintained in an upright state, and the attitude | position of a moving member can be stabilized in a raise position.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a pinion and a rack of the transmission means each include a base member disposed rotatably and movable, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member. Are arranged opposite to each other along the direction of movement of the rack, and the base member includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the direction of movement of the rack and are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. The game machine F3 is characterized in that one end side of the pair of link members is interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, since a pair of link members are disposed facing each other in the rack moving direction, the pair of link members disposed facing each other in the rack moving direction cancel each other's displacement. It is possible to fit and maintain its posture. On the other hand, since the moving member is offset with respect to the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack, the link member is likely to change in the center of gravity position due to the input of disturbance, and the posture of the link member is difficult to maintain. However, one end side of the pair of link members is interposed between the opposing surfaces of the pair of opposing wall portions, respectively, and the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members is achieved by the pair of opposing wall portions. The displacement to can be regulated. Thereby, the attitude | position of a pair of link member can be maintained, and a moving member can be moved with the stable attitude | position.

  In the gaming machine F3, the standing height of at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member is increased as the moving member approaches the raised position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the raised position (that is, as the link member is erected), the standing height of the opposing wall portion is increased (that is, one end of the link member with respect to the opposing wall portion). Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the movement of the moving member while improving the appearance. That is, it is possible to suppress the appearance from being damaged by the facing wall portion by raising the height of the opposed wall portion rather than the entire standing height, and to raise the link member (that is, As the moving member becomes more difficult to move in a stable posture), the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member by the opposing wall portion can be enhanced. As a result, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture while suppressing the appearance from being damaged.

  In this case, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member, the portion where the standing height is increased is a state where the moving member is disposed at the lowered position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable that the height is set so that it can face the other end side (side connected to the moving member) of the link member. According to this configuration, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged at the lowered position can be obtained at the same time by using the portion where the standing height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. Can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extension member extending in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extension member and the extension A guide portion guided along an extending direction of the member, wherein the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to a tooth surface of the rack and perpendicular to the moving direction of the rack, and the extending member is The gaming machine F5 is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the extending member that extends in the direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guides the guide portion of the moving member along the extending direction is provided. Since the extending member is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, the effect of offsetting the moving member (ie, necessary for holding the moving member) Smooth movement of the moving member can be ensured while exhibiting a sufficient suppression of energy consumption).

  In addition, when providing a pair of link members and providing an interposed part between these pairs of link members, it is preferable to arrange an extending member inside the interposed part. The extension member is arranged in the central part where the pair of link members face each other, and while improving the guiding effect of the movement of the moving member, the inside of the interposed portion that becomes a dead space is effectively utilized, and the overall size can be reduced. Because you can.

  A game comprising a movable member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member has teeth at least in part and a first transmission member to which the moving member is connected, and a second tooth having at least a part of teeth that can mesh with the teeth of the first transmission member. A transmission member and a connection member connected to the second transmission member and transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member, the connection member being continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 in which teeth are formed.

  According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member via the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member is engaged with each other. Is transmitted to the first transmission member, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved along with the rotation of the first transmission member.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are applied to the moving member. A first transmission member connected to the moving member, and a second transmission member that engages with the first transmission member and transmits the driving force of the drive unit to the first transmission member via the engagement. There is a gaming machine in which a part of driving means is formed by a transmission member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-110376). In this case, the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first transmission member engaged with the second transmission member is rotated, so that the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved. It is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the moving member is connected to the first transmission member, the moving member is moved by rotating the first transmission member and the second transmission member by the driving force of the driving means. When the moving member sways, the first transmission member is displaced along with the swaying of the moving member, and the engagement with the second transmission member may be lost. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the meshing area with the teeth of the second transmission member is equivalent to the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member. When the surface pressure is reduced and concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, uneven wear of the tooth is caused, and the durability may be lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the connecting member is formed with teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member, so even if the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. Thereby, it can suppress that the mesh | engagement of a 1st transmission member and a 2nd transmission member remove | deviates. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced with the movement of the moving member, it is possible to secure a meshing area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connecting member. Wear can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  Note that the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not need to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same applies to other gears.

  In the gaming machine G1, the connecting member is erected along the axial direction of the second transmission member from the axial end surface of the second transmission member, and the tooth forming portion where the teeth are formed, and the tooth formation A body portion connected to a standing tip of the portion, and the tooth forming portion has a surface opposite to the side on which the teeth are formed curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the second transmission member A gaming machine G2 formed as a concave curved surface.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected along the axial direction of the second transmission member from the axial end surface of the second transmission member, and the second Since the surface opposite to the side where the teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the transmission member are formed is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape around the axis of the second transmission member, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is Even when connecting to the axial end face of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end face of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member attached to the axial end face of the second transmission member is increased accordingly. Diameter can be increased. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally formed from a resin material, the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed is formed as a concave curved surface as described above, thereby forming the tooth forming portion. It is possible to make the wall thickness uniform in order to improve the moldability.

  In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the teeth are formed in a tooth forming portion of the connecting member over a range from an axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion. It is possible to secure a sufficient area and prevent the meshing between the first transmission member and the second transmission member from deviating more reliably. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally formed from a resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the thickness of the tooth forming portion is reduced as a whole. It is possible to improve the moldability by making it uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are disposed and the second movement member formed to be movable, and the guide for guiding the second movement member in a linear direction. The transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack that is engaged with the pinion and is displaced as the pinion rotates. The gaming machine G4 has one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the second transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 includes the second moving member in which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are disposed, and the second moving member is a guide member. The transmission means includes a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack that is engaged with the pinion and displaced as the pinion rotates, and the connecting member is attached to the rack. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the coupling member is displaced by operating the rack and pinion by the driving force of the driving means, and the second is accompanied by the displacement of the coupling member. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be performed simultaneously. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be shared by one member (connecting member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

  In the gaming machine G4, the rack has a tooth surface meshed with the pinion disposed substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is disposed horizontally in the rack. In accordance with the displacement in the direction, the guide member is guided in the vertical direction, and when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member is configured such that the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion are the first transmission. A gaming machine G5, which is disposed at a position corresponding to a tooth of a member.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the rack has a tooth surface meshed with the pinion disposed substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is moved in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since the guide member is guided in the vertical direction along with the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the one side in the horizontal direction of the rack is moved. As the connecting member is tilted, the second moving member is moved downward (lowered) toward the lower position while the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion. Then, as the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction, the connecting member is raised, and the second moving member is moved upward (raised) toward the raised position as the connecting member is raised.

  In this case, in a state where the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member is erected, so that it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. As a result, the posture of the moving member disposed on the second moving member becomes more unstable. For this reason, the shaking of the second moving member makes the shaking of the moving member more remarkable, and the displacement of the first transmission member accompanying the shaking of the moving member increases. That is, in a state where the second moving member is disposed at the raised position, the engagement between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is likely to be disengaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the connecting member is configured such that the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion are the first transmission. Since it is disposed at a position corresponding to the tooth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member is increased due to the shaking of the moving member, and the engagement between the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most easily disengaged. The teeth formed in the tooth forming part can be effectively used. Thereby, it can suppress effectively that the mesh | engagement with a 1st transmission member and a 2nd transmission member remove | deviates.

  In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means includes the rack, a connecting member connected at one end to the rack, a second transmitting member connected at the other end of the connecting member, and teeth at the second transmitting member. The pair includes a pair of a first transmission member and a moving member coupled to the first transmission member, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member of one set are the first transmission of the other set. One set and the other set may be arranged so as to face each other along the moving direction of the rack in a state of being engaged with the member and the second transmission member. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy between the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even if only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are meshed, the synchronization accuracy of the moving member can be improved. The first transmission member and the second transmission member are By being engaged with each other, it is possible to increase the number of toothed locations (toothed area) and to disperse the surface pressure of the tooth surface accordingly, so that the durability can be improved.

  A plurality of moving members formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the plurality of moving members, respectively. And a plurality of the moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at a reference position so that the plurality of moving members are coupled to each other. The plurality of moving members are moved in directions close to each other and are arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and directions in which the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. A third moving member that is brought into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member from a substantially orthogonal direction, wherein the third moving member is the reference The first moving member and the second moving member in contact with each other to form a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, the first moving member, A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the second moving member and the third moving member are combined.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by the transmitting means, so that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are transmitted. The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at the reference position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of moving members formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a driving force of the driving unit A plurality of moving members, each of which is retracted to a different retracted position and moved from a different retracted position and disposed at a reference position. There is a gaming machine to which is coupled (see, for example, JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, if the plurality of moving members at the reference position are not appropriately combined, the effect of combining the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is relatively easy to connect a pair of symmetrical moving members face to face, but it is difficult to connect three or more moving members.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, at the reference position, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other, and substantially orthogonal to the adjacent directions of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member comes into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since forces in directions to make them approach each other are formed, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be appropriately combined. As a result, it is possible to ensure a presentation effect by combining a plurality of moving members.

  In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first contact portion and a second contact portion, respectively, and are in contact with the first contact portion and the second contact portion, respectively. The third moving member has a third abutting portion, and the third abutting portion of the third moving member is a first abutting portion and a second abutting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. By abutting each other, a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other is formed, and the first moving member and the second moving member face the third moving member. The external appearance shape of the side is formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion and is a concave shape that is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member, The third moving member includes the first moving member and the first moving member. The external shape on the side facing the moving member is a protruding shape formed by the third abutting portion and projecting at the center corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. Characteristic gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and the first moving member and the second moving member are in contact with each other. When the third contact portion of the third moving member comes into contact, a force is generated in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, whereby the first moving member and the second moving member are formed. And the third moving member are coupled.

  In this case, the first moving member and the second moving member have a concave shape in which the external shape (combination of the first contact portion and the second contact portion) facing the third moving member is recessed at the center. On the other hand, the third moving member has an outer appearance shape (third contact portion) on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member. Therefore, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are moved from the retracted position to the reference position and combined at the reference position, thereby improving the effect of presentation. be able to.

  That is, the external shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member and the third moving member facing each other are the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged side by side as described above. In the form in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has a protruding shape, the first moving member and the second movement that are arranged next to each other when the third moving member is arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. When the third moving member enters between the members and pushes the first moving member and the second moving member away from each other, the player is reminded of the third movement at the reference position according to the gaming machine H2. The member (third contact portion) is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (first contact portion and second contact portion), so that the first moving member and the second moving member are brought into contact with each other. Create a force in the direction of approaching The first moving member can be coupled to second movable member and the third movable member. Thereby, in addition to the effect which game machine H1 plays, it can be operated in the mode different from a player's expectation, and the production effect can be heightened.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported on the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member are at the reference position. In the state of being arranged next to each other, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a letter C shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member side is narrower than the base member side. preferable. By setting the angle formed between the first contact portion and the second contact portion and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed between the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because a force in a direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other can be formed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the external shape of the first moving member and the second moving member facing the third moving member is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. While the third moving member has a concave shape, the external shape on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member corresponds to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. A gaming machine H3 having a protruding shape with a protruding center.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member have a concave shape in which the outer shape on the side facing the third moving member is recessed at the center, In the third moving member, the external shape on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member is a protruding shape in which the center protrudes corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect by moving the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member from the retracted position to the reference position and coupling them at the reference position.

  That is, the external shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member and the third moving member facing each other are the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged side by side as described above. In the form in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has a protruding shape, the first moving member and the second movement that are arranged next to each other when the third moving member is arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. When the third moving member enters between the members and pushes the first moving member and the second moving member away from each other, the player is reminded of the third movement at the reference position according to the gaming machine H3. Forming a force in a direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member come close to each other by contacting the members, and combining the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member Can do. Thereby, it can be made to operate | move in the aspect different from a player's expectation, and the presentation effect can be heightened.

  In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first contact surface and a second contact surface, and are in contact with each of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. The third moving member includes a third abutting surface, and at least one of the third abutting surface, the first abutting surface, and the second abutting surface has the third moving member at the reference position. And the third contact surface is contacted from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. A gaming machine H4, wherein the first moving member and the second moving member are displaced in a direction to bring them close to each other.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface is directed toward the reference position by the third moving member. The first moving member is formed as an inclined surface that expands toward the advancing direction side when moved in such a manner that the third contact surface comes into contact with both the first contact surface and the second contact surface. Since the second moving member and the second moving member are displaced toward each other, the first moving member and the second moving member can be surely displaced in the directions approaching each other. Therefore, the structure that allows the first moving member and the second moving member to move can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

  In the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are respectively disposed on the back side of the portion that forms the external shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the third contact surface. The game machine H5, wherein the contact surface is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the external shape of the third moving member.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are arranged on the back side of the portion that forms the external shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. And the third contact surface is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the external shape of the third moving member, so that the first contact surface, the second contact surface, and the third contact surface Can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation.

  A movable member formed so as to be movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In a gaming machine, wherein the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member A gaming machine I1 comprising positioning means for positioning a meshing position at the predetermined phase.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member formed to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are applied to the moving member. There is a gaming machine including a transmission means for transmitting, the transmission means including a first transmission member and a second transmission member engaged with the first transmission member at a predetermined phase (for example, a special feature). (See JP 2009-125092). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the rotation of the one, The moving member is moved by the other rotation. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the second transmission member is not meshed with a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member, a shift occurs in the moving range of the moving member. Therefore, when assembling (meshing) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to assemble after positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, The positioning work was complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the positioning means for positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase is provided, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (tooth). The first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled using such positioning means. That is, when positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member at a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning operation can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction.

  The gaming machine I1 includes a base member on which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotatably supported, and the positioning means includes a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. And a first transmission member positioning portion and a second transmission member positioning portion respectively formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. A gaming machine I2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the base member is formed with the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion, and corresponds to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, the first transmission member positioning portion is made to coincide with the first base positioning portion, and By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while matching the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. Can be positioned. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

  In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion or the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion or the second transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole, the one penetration By positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member by inserting the jig through the hole and bringing the tip of the inserted jig into contact (or insertion) with the other, the positioning operation is simplified. And accurately.

  In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft that project from the front of the base member and are inserted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, when the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft that protrude from the front surface of the base member and are inserted through the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission are positioned while positioning the second transmission member at a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When the member is assembled to the base member, the positioning operation and the assembling operation can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved.

  That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted from the back surface of the base member to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. Thus, the jig can be protruded from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. Thus, simultaneously with the operation of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the first shaft and the second shaft from the front of the base member, the tips of the jigs are connected to the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively. Positioning work for contacting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion can be performed. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portions are formed as through holes at positions corresponding to each other of the pair of members. A gaming machine I4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is located at a position corresponding to the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are respectively formed as through holes, the positioning operation of the pair of gears can be performed simultaneously, and the workability of the positioning operation can be improved accordingly. In addition, since the positioning operation of the pair of gears can be performed using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to couple the pair of gears, the pair of gears can be pivotally supported on a common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may be configured similarly.

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the pair of members includes a protruding portion that protrudes from one member, and the protruding portion. A recess formed in the other member for receiving, and the second transmission member positioning portion is formed on a member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members. Game machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is composed of a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped in the axial direction, and the member that is disposed on the base member side of the pair of members. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed on the base member, the second transmission member positioning portion can be used to position the member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members at a predetermined phase. . In this case, the pair of members can be positioned at a predetermined phase by allowing the protrusions of one member to be received in the recesses of the other member, and cannot be relatively rotated (ie, synchronized). Can be supported on a common shaft. In particular, since the protrusions are received and fitted into the recesses of the pair of members, the rigidity as a whole can be increased accordingly.

  In addition, the recessed part does not need to be bottomed and may be formed as a through-hole. That is, it is sufficient that the concave portion is formed so as to be capable of positioning in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) by receiving the connecting protrusion when the pair of members are coaxially stacked.

  A game comprising a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out port for discharging game balls that have flowed down without being won in the plurality of winning holes from the gaming area In the machine, the first winning port of the plurality of winning ports is close to the lower edge of the gaming area until the position where the gaming ball cannot pass between the lower edge of the gaming area or the The abutment is disposed in contact with a lower edge of the game area, and the out port is a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port, and the first A gaming machine J1 comprising: a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the winning port.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning holes disposed below the liquid crystal display device, and a game ball that has flowed down without winning a prize in the plurality of winning holes There is a gaming machine provided with an outlet opening that discharges from the outlet (see, for example, JP 2012-143268 A). In recent years, an increase in the size of a liquid crystal display device has been required in order to enhance the effect. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, if the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward, it is necessary to lower the position of the winning opening accordingly. When the position of the winning opening is lowered too much, there is no space for the game ball to flow down below the winning opening (between the lower edge of the gaming area, for example, the inner rail). That is, the game balls that have flowed down without winning a prize can not be discharged from the outlet. For this reason, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be sufficiently enlarged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out port includes a first out port disposed on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port of the plurality of winning ports, And a second out port disposed on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning port of the game, so that the first winning port is not won and the first winning port is positioned on one side in the width direction. The game balls that have flowed down can be discharged from the game area through the first out port, while the game balls that have not flowed into the first winning port and have flowed down to the other side in the width direction from the first winning port are second. It can be discharged from the game area by the out port. Thereby, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (lower edge of the game area, for example, between the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot be passed between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device Can be enlarged.

  The gaming machine J1 includes an effect member that provides an effect associated with winning a game ball to a second winning port of the plurality of winning ports, and a gaming board in which the gaming area is formed on the front side transmits light. The effect member is disposed at a position corresponding to the second prize opening on the back side of the game board, and the second prize opening and the effect member are provided in the first prize opening. On the other hand, the gaming machine J2 is arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, it is provided with a production member that produces an effect in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the second winning port out of the plurality of winning ports, Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second prize opening on the back side of the game board made of a light-transmitting material, the scene for the player who visually recognizes the scene where the game ball is won to the second prize opening. The effect by the effect member can be simultaneously recognized behind the player, and the effect accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

  In this case, since the second prize opening and the production member are arranged on the one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first prize opening, the position of the second prize opening and the production member Can be lowered, and accordingly, the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be increased in size even when the effect member is provided.

  That is, disposing an effect member on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second prize opening obstructs an increase in size of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the first out-port and the second out-port are disposed on one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port. In addition to being able to lower the position of the first prize opening, it is possible to secure the degree of freedom of the arrangement position on the one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area of the first prize opening. As a result, according to the gaming machine J2, a layout in which the effect members are disposed on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second prize port. Became possible.

  In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second winning opening is disposed at a substantially center in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J2, the second prize opening is arranged at the approximate center in the width direction of the gaming area, so that the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased while the gaming area is limited. By effectively utilizing the space provided, it is possible to secure a wider space for arranging the production members. That is, with this layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. In addition, the second winning a prize opening is arranged at the substantially center in the width direction of the game area, so that the flow path of the game ball to the second winning award can be lengthened. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gameability for winning the game ball to the second winning opening, and it is possible to enhance the expectation for the effect by the effect member accompanying the winning to the second winning opening.

  The gaming machine J2 or J3 includes a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board, and the second effect member is arranged at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps the effect member in a front view. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being installed.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the gaming machine J4 includes a second performance member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and the second performance member is at least one in front view. Since the part is arranged at a position overlapping the effect member, when the game board is formed of a light-transmitting material, only the necessary part of the second effect member is visually recognized and the other part is effected. The member can be shielded from the player. Thereby, since it is not necessary to design the 2nd production member on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized from a player, the improvement of the freedom degree of the design can be aimed at.

  In any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning prize opening.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can rotate around the second winning opening, and therefore surrounds the second winning opening. It is possible to produce an effect in the entire area, and it is possible to enhance the effect of producing the effect accompanying winning in the second prize opening.

  In this case, the second winning opening needs to be disposed at a position where a space for allowing the game ball to flow down can be secured both above and below the second winning opening, and the game area of the gaming area is relative to the second winning opening. Since the first winning port is arranged at a position on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the effect member is formed in a circle centered on the second winning port. Thus, the space that can be secured around the second winning opening can be utilized to the maximum extent, and as a result, the area of the effect member can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic K group> (Preview display mode during normal background is displayed during SPGT)
Lottery means for performing lottery based on establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information displayed on the display means A time information determining means for determining whether or not the time information of the time measuring means is set time information in a gaming machine comprising a time measuring means capable of timing even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off And a state switching means for switching from the first effect state set at the normal time to the second effect state for a predetermined period based on the determination by the time information determination means as the set time information, A plurality of background images displayed on the display means, and a background selection means for selecting a background image associated with each of the first effect state and the second effect state; In accordance with the type of the background image selected, a display mode displayed on the display unit while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display unit is displayed in a plurality of ways associated with the background image. An effect selecting means capable of selecting one effect from the effects, and the effect selecting means, when the first effect state is set, the effect mode from the first effect mode group When the second production state is set, the production mode is selected from the first production mode group and the second production mode group, respectively. A gaming machine K1.

  According to the gaming machine K1, lottery is executed by the lottery means based on establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. Identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, it is timed by the time measuring means. Whether the time information of the time measuring means is set time information is determined by the time information determining means. Based on the fact that the time information discriminating means discriminates the set time information, the state switching means switches from the first effect state set at the normal time to the second effect state for a predetermined period. A background image that is a plurality of background images displayed on the display means and is associated with each of the first effect state and the second effect state is selected by the background selection means. In accordance with the type of the background image selected by the background selection means, while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, a presentation mode displayed on the display means is displayed in a plurality of ways associated with the background image. One effect is selected from the effects by the effect selecting means. When the first effect state is set, the effect mode is selected from the first effect mode group, and when the second effect state is set, the first effect mode group and the above-mentioned An effect mode is selected by the effect mode selection means from the second effect mode group. Thereby, even when the second effect state is set, various effect modes are selected, so that the game effects can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine K1, the background selection means selects one background image from among the plurality of different background images dedicated to the first presentation state based on the setting of the first presentation state, When a background image dedicated to the first rendering state and a background image dedicated to the second rendering state are selected based on the second rendering state being set, and the second rendering state is selected The game machine K2 is characterized in that the background image in the second effect state is forcibly displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the background selection means selects one background image from the plurality of background images dedicated to the first presentation state based on the setting of the first presentation state. Based on the setting of the second effect state, the background image dedicated to the first effect state and the background image dedicated to the second effect state are selected by the background selection means. When the second effect state is selected, the background image in the second effect state is forcibly displayed on the display means. Thereby, when the time measured by the time measuring means becomes the set time, it can be changed to a dedicated background image at a timing synchronized with a plurality of gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that has an impact on the player.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the first effect state is set, the effect selecting unit selects a dedicated effect mode based on the background image selected by the background selecting unit, When the second effect state is set, a dedicated effect mode corresponding to the background image dedicated to the first effect state selected by the background selecting unit and the background image dedicated to the second effect state A gaming machine K3, which selects a dedicated production mode corresponding to each.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the first effect state is set, a dedicated effect mode based on the background image selected by the background selecting means is selected. Is done. When the second effect state is set, a dedicated effect mode corresponding to the background image dedicated to the first effect state selected by the background selection means and a dedicated effect corresponding to the background image dedicated to the second effect state Since each of the production modes is selected by the production selection means, there is an effect that various productions can be provided to the player even when the second production state is set.

<Characteristic L group> (A battle effect is executed across the jackpot variation and the jackpot round effect)
Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, whether or not to determine whether or not to win, a display unit capable of displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, and the identification information displayed on the display unit are moved. Dynamic display means for automatically displaying, a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player after the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, and the bonus game executing means The game state setting means for setting one of the first game state set after the bonus game is executed and the second game state more advantageous than the first game state, and the game state setting means. In a gaming machine having a gaming state determination means for determining a gaming state to be set, when the determination result is the specific determination result, it is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. As the dynamic display mode of the identification information, while the dynamic display mode determination unit that determines the first dynamic display mode and the privilege game execution unit is executing the bonus game, the display unit has an effect mode. Effect mode display means for displaying, and effect mode selection means for selecting the effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means based on the type of the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination means, The first dynamic display mode and the production mode are displayed in combination with each other, thereby providing a notification display mode for notifying the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit. Game machine L1.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. After the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Either the first gaming state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means or the second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is determined by the gaming state determination means. When the determination result is a specific determination result, the first dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit as the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. . While the privilege game execution means is executing the privilege game, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect mode display means. The effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means is selected by the effect mode selection means based on the type of game state determined by the game state determination means. The first dynamic display mode and the production mode are displayed in combination with each other, thereby becoming a notification display mode for notifying the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit. This makes it possible to set a longer production period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, whether or not to determine whether or not to win, a display unit capable of displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination unit, and the identification information displayed on the display unit are moved. Dynamic display means for automatically displaying, dynamic display time determining means for determining a time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means, and identification information indicating a specific determination result on the display means is displayed. And a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and an effect mode display means for displaying an effect mode on the display means during a period in which the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game executing means. And a gaming state in which one of a first gaming state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. In a gaming machine having a determination means and a gaming state determination means for determining a gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, the dynamic determination is performed when the determination result is the specific determination result. A combined display time determining means for determining a combined display time including a display time for displaying the effect form by the effect form display means in the dynamic display time determined by the display time determining means, and the combined display time; A dynamic display mode determining unit that determines a dynamic display mode of state information indicating the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining unit, corresponding to the combined display time determined by the determining unit. A gaming machine L2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine L2, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. After the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The production mode is displayed on the display unit by the production mode display unit during the period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution unit. Either the first gaming state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means or the second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is determined by the gaming state determination means. When the determination result is a specific determination result, the combined display time including the display time in which the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display unit in the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination unit Is determined by the composite display time determining means. Corresponding to the combined display time determined by the combined display time determining unit, the dynamic display mode determining unit determines the dynamic display mode of the state information indicating the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining unit. This makes it possible to set a longer production period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic M group> (Synchronize the stop timing of the rotating accessory indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations with the temporary stop timing)
An acquisition means for acquiring information when establishment of a start condition is detected, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of a lottery condition Based on the information, whether or not to determine whether or not to be correct, display means capable of displaying identification information indicating the result of the determination of correctness or failure, and dynamic display for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means A selection means for selecting a display mode of the identification information to be performed by the display unit from among a plurality of types of display modes executed in the dynamic display of the identification information. The mode includes a quasi-continuous mode that is a display mode in which the quasi-dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one identification information. A rotating rotating means attached to the front side of a notification mode for informing whether the pseudo dynamic display is a pseudo-dynamic display number of times since the start of the pseudo continuous mode, A gaming machine M1 having rotation control means for rotating the rotation means to stop at a position indicating a predetermined notification mode in synchronization with each dynamic display time of the pseudo-continuous mode.

  According to the gaming machine M1, information is acquired by the acquisition means when establishment of the start condition is detected. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the determination is made by the determination unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The selection unit selects a display mode of the identification information to be performed by the display unit from a plurality of types of display modes executed in the dynamic display of the identification information. The display mode includes a pseudo continuous mode which is a display mode in which pseudo dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the dynamic display of one piece of identification information. When the pseudo-continuous mode is being executed, the notification mode for informing the number of times that the pseudo-dynamic display currently being performed is the pseudo-dynamic display after the start of the pseudo-continuous mode is the front. The rotation control means attached to the side is rotated and stopped by the rotation control means at a position indicating a predetermined notification mode in synchronization with each dynamic display time of the pseudo continuous mode. This makes it possible to match the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuation to the rotation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels uncomfortable due to the notification of the number of times of pseudo variation and the shift of the pseudo variation stop timing.

  In the gaming machine M1, the rotating means has a circular rotating portion, and a symbol indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is given to the circumferential surface on the front side of the rotating portion as the notification mode. The control means controls the game machine M2 so that a symbol indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is stopped at a predetermined stop position in synchronization with the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuation mode.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a circular rotating part, and a symbol indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations is given to the rotating means as a notification mode on the circumferential surface on the front side of the rotating part. The rotation control means controls the symbol indicating the number of times of pseudo fluctuation to stop at a predetermined stop position in synchronization with the stop timing of the pseudo fluctuation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of pseudo fluctuations can be easily notified to the player.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the rotating means has a determining means for determining the rotation start timing of the rotating means so that the rotating means can be stopped at a predetermined stop position at the end timing of the pseudo-variable dynamic display time, The gaming machine M3, wherein the rotation control means starts rotation of the rotation means according to the rotation start time determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination means determines the rotation start timing of the rotation means so that the rotation means can be stopped at a predetermined stop position at the end timing of the pseudo-variable dynamic display time. The rotation control means starts rotation of the rotation means according to the rotation start time determined by the determination means. Thereby, it is possible to control the rotation means so that the stop position becomes a predetermined position. Therefore, there is an effect that the control of the rotating means can be facilitated.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the rotation control unit performs control to rotate the rotation unit in a high speed state through a low speed state and stop at a predetermined position from the high speed state. A gaming machine M4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are produced. That is, when rotating the rotating means, the rotation control means executes control for rotating in the high speed state through the low speed state and stopping at the predetermined position from the high speed state. Therefore, since the rotating means is stopped from the high speed state, there is an effect that powerful notification can be given to the player.

<Characteristic N group> (In the SW long press effect, the variable speed of the SW charge effect is varied depending on the remaining SW effective time.)
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not the game is successful, and a privilege game executing unit for executing a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination result being a predetermined result. And an operating means that can be operated by the player, an effective period setting means for setting an effective period for determining that the operation is effective when the operating means is operated, and an effective period setting means. When the effective period is set, based on the operation determination means for determining whether the operation condition is satisfied based on the operation, and based on the determination that the operation condition is satisfied by the operation determination means The game includes: an effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect; and a condition variable setting means for variably setting the operation condition based on the remaining period of the effective period. N1.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the determination result being a predetermined result, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The operating means that can be operated by the player and the effective period during which the operation is determined to be effective when the operating means is operated are set by the effective period setting means. When the effective period is set by the effective period setting unit, the operation determining unit determines whether the operation condition is satisfied based on the operation. Based on the determination that the operation condition is established by the operation determining means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means. The operation condition is changed based on the remaining period of the effective period and set by the condition variable setting means. Accordingly, since the operation condition is set variably based on the remaining period of the effective period, the condition under which the effect is executed can be varied. Therefore, the player can experience different games by changing the remaining period of the effective time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine N1, the operation determination means determines that the operation condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operation means has been operated continuously for a predetermined period or more within the effective period. The gaming machine N2, wherein the condition variable setting means variably sets a predetermined period according to the remaining period of the effective period.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N1, the operation determination means is satisfied when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated continuously for a predetermined period or more within the effective period. Is discriminated by the operation discriminating means. The predetermined period is varied according to the remaining period of the effective period and is set by the condition variable means. Therefore, even if the remaining period of the effective period is reduced, it becomes possible to easily satisfy the operation condition, so that the player can enjoy the effect.

<Feature O group> (Enemy weaknesses, protagonist skills, etc. are set based on past history of battle production)
Based on the establishment of the start condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not the game is correct, a display unit for displaying identification information indicating a determination result by the determination unit, and a presentation mode of the identification information displayed on the display unit And a display information determining means for determining one display information from a plurality of display information, when the effect mode determined by the effect display mode determining means is a specific effect mode, Based on the display of the display information determined by the display information determination means and the history information storage means for storing the type of display information determined by the display information determination means as the history information, a privilege is given to the player A privilege variable that varies the privilege given by the privilege granting unit based on the display of the privilege granting unit and the display information stored in the history information storage unit. Gaming machine O1, characterized in that it comprises a control means.

  According to the gaming machine O1, whether or not a game is appropriate is determined by the appropriateness determination means based on the establishment of the start condition. Identification information indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit. The effect mode of the identification information displayed on the display means is determined by the effect mode determining means. When the effect mode determined by the effect display mode determining means is a specific effect mode, one display information is determined by the display information determining means from the plurality of display information. The type of display information determined by the display information determining means is stored as history information by the history information storage means. Based on the display information determined by the display information determining means being displayed, a privilege is given to the player by the privilege providing means. The privilege given by the privilege grant unit based on the display information stored in the history information storage unit being changed by the privilege variable control unit. Thereby, since a privilege is variably set based on history information, it can enjoy changing a privilege by performing a game for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be encouraged to play the game for a longer period.

  In the gaming machine O1, when the identification information indicating that the determination result by the success / failure determination unit is a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, a privilege game execution unit that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player And the game state to be transferred after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means is set to either the first game state or the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A game state setting unit; and a game state determination unit that determines a game state set by the game state setting unit based on a predetermined lottery. The privilege granting unit is determined by the game state determination unit. A gaming machine O2 is provided with a notification mode for notifying the gaming state before the gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the identification information indicating that the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution unit. One of the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is the game state setting means for the game state to be transferred after the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means. Is set by The gaming state set by the gaming state setting unit is determined based on a predetermined lottery. The privilege giving means gives a notification mode for notifying the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination means before the gaming state is set. Therefore, since the privilege of whether or not the notification mode is notified varies based on the history information, the player can play the game so that the notification mode is notified by playing the game longer. There is an effect that can be done.

  Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K3, L1 to L2, A gaming machine Z1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any of M1 to M4, N1 to N2, and O1 to O2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K3, L1 to L2, A gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M1 to M4, N1 to N2, and O1 to O2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to I5, J1 to J5, K1 to K3, L1 to L2, A gaming machine Z3, wherein in any one of M1 to M4, N1 to N2, and O1 to O2, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery game is executed in which a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, a predetermined symbol is variably displayed on the display device for a predetermined time, and then the symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. The While the predetermined symbol is fluctuating, a notice symbol or the like for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-223600 A).
In this type of pachinko machine, if the time for displaying a predetermined symbol on the display device is lengthened, the time until the jackpot start is lengthened and the efficiency of the game is deteriorated, so a short time is set. However, by shortening the time for displaying the predetermined symbol on the display device, there is a problem that the time for the production is shortened, the sufficient performance cannot be performed, and the player gets bored early.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from getting bored with a game early.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 can display a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition and identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. It is advantageous to the player after the display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the identification information indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. One of a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, a first game state set after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state A game state setting means for setting one and a game state determination means for determining a game state set by the game state setting means, and when the determination result is the specific determination result, Previous As a dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit, a dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a first dynamic display mode and the special game execution unit are executing a special game. In the meantime, the effect mode display means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and the effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means are selected based on the type of gaming state determined by the gaming state determination means. A display mode for notifying the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit by displaying the first dynamic display mode and the rendering mode in combination with each other. It will be.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 displays, on the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, a determination unit for determining whether or not to execute the determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition and identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. Possible display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and dynamic display time determination for determining the time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means And a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player after the identification information indicating the specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means, and the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game. An effect mode display means for displaying an effect mode on the display means during a period being played, a first gaming state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the first gaming state. A gaming state setting means for setting one of the advantageous second gaming states; and a gaming state determination means for determining a gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, wherein the determination result is In the case of a specific determination result, the combined display time including the display time for displaying the effect mode by the effect mode display unit in the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination unit. In accordance with the combined display time determining means to be determined and the combined display time determined by the combined display time determining means, the dynamic display mode of the state information indicating the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is determined. Dynamic display mode determination means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination unit based on the establishment of the lottery condition. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed by the display unit. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. After the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. Either the first gaming state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means or the second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is determined by the gaming state determination means. When the determination result is a specific determination result, the first dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit as the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit. . While the privilege game execution means is executing the privilege game, the effect mode is displayed on the display means by the effect mode display means. The effect mode displayed by the effect mode display means is selected by the effect mode selection means based on the type of game state determined by the game state determination means. The first dynamic display mode and the production mode are displayed in combination with each other, thereby becoming a notification display mode for notifying the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit.
This makes it possible to set a longer production period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, whether or not the game is determined is determined by the determination unit. Identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information displayed on the display means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. A time for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display time determining means. After the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. The production mode is displayed on the display unit by the production mode display unit during the period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution unit. Either the first gaming state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means or the second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming state set by the gaming state setting means is determined by the gaming state determination means. When the determination result is a specific determination result, the combined display time including the display time in which the effect mode is displayed by the effect mode display unit in the dynamic display time determined by the dynamic display time determination unit Is determined by the composite display time determining means. Corresponding to the combined display time determined by the combined display time determining unit, the dynamic display mode determining unit determines the dynamic display mode of the state information indicating the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining unit.
This makes it possible to set a longer production period for notifying the determined gaming state. Therefore, various effects can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device ( display means )

Claims (2)

On the basis of the establishment of the lottery condition, a determination unit for determining whether or not to win,
Display means capable of displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means;
A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player after the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means;
A game state setting means for setting one of a first game state set after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state;
In a gaming machine having gaming state determination means for determining a gaming state set by the gaming state setting means,
A dynamic display mode in which a first dynamic display mode is determined as a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit when the determination result is the specific determination result. A determination means;
An effect mode display means for displaying an effect mode on the display means while the privilege game execution means is executing a privilege game;
The type of game state determined by the game state determination unit and the first dynamic display mode executed before the bonus game is executed as the effect mode displayed by the display mode display unit. Production mode selection means for selecting based on the content;
Storage means capable of storing the effect information in the effect mode selected by the effect mode selection means in addition to the effect information already stored ;
When the effect mode corresponding to the effect information stored in the storage means is executed in the privilege game, the effect is changed to a mode that is more advantageous to the player than when the effect information is not stored. Production variable execution means capable of executing the production mode ,
The first dynamic display mode and the presentation mode are displayed in combination with each other, thereby providing a notification display mode for notifying the gaming state determined by the gaming state determination unit.
The effect variable execution means is changed to a mode in which the player can expect to be in a notification display mode for notifying that the second gaming state is determined as an advantageous mode for the player. The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the production mode .   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images